479
Sergeants Distance Education Program 8017A

Weapons

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Weapons

Sergeants Distance Education Program

8017A

Page 2: Weapons

MCI Course 8017 i Course Introduction

WEAPONS (8017)

Course Introduction

Scope The Weapons course is designed to provide the Marine sergeant with

technical and detailed instruction on the characteristics and operation of some of the most common small arms found in the Marine Corps arsenal. These include the �� M9 pistol �� M203 grenade launcher �� M249 squad automatic weapon (SAW) �� M240G machinegun �� M2HB .50 caliber machinegun �� MK19 machinegun �� Traversing and elevating mechanism �� M136, 84MM HEAT launcher and high explosive anti-tank cartridge

(AT-4) Discussion of each weapon includes its �� Characteristics �� Operation �� Maintenance �� Firing Procedures �� Employment If you find that you need a detailed review of a particular weapon, you will probably want to enroll in specific weapons courses (commonly called “red books”) offered by the Marine Corps Institute.

Continued on next page

Page 3: Weapons

MCI Course 8017 ii Course Introduction

Course Introduction, Continued

References The following references were used in the writing of this course:

�� TM 9-1010-221-10, Operators Manual, Grenade Launcher, 40mm, M203. �� TM 08671A-10/1, Operators Manual, Machinegun, 5.56, M249. �� TM 08670B-10/1, Operators Manual, Machinegun, 240 Machinegun

Series. �� TM 08670B-10/1A, Supplement-1 Operators Manual. �� TM 9-1005-213-10, Operators Manual Machinegun, Caliber .50.

Browning, M2, Heavy Barrel and Mount, Tripod, Machinegun, Caliber .50, M3.

�� TM 08521A-10/1A, Operator’s Manual, Machinegun, 40mm, MK19 Mod 3.

�� TM 1005A-10/1, Operators Manual, Pistol, 9mm, M9. �� TM 9-1010-221-10, Rifle, 5.56mm, M-16A2 W/E. �� TM 9-1315-886-12, Operator's and Unit Maintenance Manual for

Launcher and Cartridge, 84 Millimeter: M136 (AT4). �� MCWP 3-15.1, Machineguns and Machinegun Gunnery. �� FMFM 6-5, Marine Rifle Squad. �� FM 3-23.25, Light Anti-Armor Weapons.

Table of Contents

The following is a table of contents for this course.

Study Unit Title Page -- Course Introduction i 1 M9 Pistol 1-1 2 M203 Grenade Launcher 2-1 3 M249 Squad Automatic Weapon (SAW) 3-1 4 M240G Machinegun MOD 3 4-1 5 M2HB .50 Caliber Machinegun 5-1 6 MK19 Machinegun 6-1 7 Traversing and Elevating Mechanism 7-1 8 M136, 84MM HEAT Launcher and High

Explosive Anti-Tank Cartridge (AT-4) 8-1

-- Review Lesson Examination R-1

Estimated Study Time

You will spend about 18 hours and 20 minutes completing this course. This includes the time you will need to study the text, complete the exercises, and take the final exam.

Continued on next page

Page 4: Weapons

MCI Course 8017 iii Course Introduction

Course Introduction, Continued

Reserve Retirement Credits

You earn 6 retirement credits for completing this course. You earn reserve retirement credits at the rate of one credit for each 3 hours of estimated study time. Note: Reserve retirement credits are not awarded for the MCI study you do

during drill periods if awarded credits for drill attendance.

Summary The table below summarizes all the important “gateways” needed to

successfully complete this course.

Step When you Then you will For more information

1 Enroll in the program Receive your program material

Refer to the Program Introduction

2 Complete the self-paced text

Arrange to take the final examination

Refer to the Program Introduction

3 Pass the final examination

Receive a course completion certificate

Refer to the Program Introduction

References The following table lists publications that can be used as additional sources of

information about the content of this course.

Publication Number Title TM 9-1010-221-10 Operator’s Manual, Grenade Launcher, 40mm,

M203 TM 08671A-10/1A Operator’s Manual, Machinegun, 5.56mm, M249 TM 08670B-10/1 Operator’s Manual, Machinegun, 240 Machinegun

Series TM 08670B-10/1A Supplement-1 Operator’s Manual TM 9-1005-213-10 Operator’s Manual Machinegun, Caliber .50,

Browning, M2, Heavy Barrel and Mount, Tripod, Machinegun, Caliber .50, M3

TM 08521A-10/1A Operator’s Manual, Machinegun, 40mm, MK19 Mod3

MCWP 3-15.1 Machineguns and Machinegun Gunnery FMFM 6-5 Marine Rifle Squad

Page 5: Weapons

MCI Course 8017 iv Course Introduction

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 6: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-1 Study Unit 1

STUDY UNIT 1

M9 PISTOL

Overview

Estimated Study Time

1 hour, 35 minutes

Unit Scope This study unit teaches you the characteristics, operation, maintenance,

immediate action, care and cleaning techniques, and firing procedures for the M9 pistol.

Learning Objectives

After completing this unit, you should be able to �� Identify the characteristics of the M9 pistol. �� Identify the procedures for maintaining the M9 pistol.

�� Identify the techniques for using the M9 pistol.

Unit Content The following table lists the lessons covered in this study unit.

Topic See Page Lesson 1 Description of the M9 Pistol 1-3 Lesson 2 Clearing, Disassembling, and Cleaning the M9

Pistol 1-11

Lesson 3 Assembling, Stoppages, and Immediate Action for the M9 Pistol

1-25

Page 7: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-2 Study Unit 1

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 8: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-3 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1

LESSON 1

DESCRIPTION OF THE M9 PISTOL

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson teaches you the basic characteristics of the M9 pistol and the

ammunition it uses.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the role of the M9 pistol.

�� Identify the principal characteristics of the M9 pistol.

�� Identify the steps in the cycle of operation of the M9 pistol.

�� Identify the standard type of ammunition for the M9 pistol.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 1-3 General Characteristics of the M9 Pistol 1-4 Cycle of Operation of the M9 Pistol 1-7 Ammunition for the M9 Pistol 1-8 Lesson 1 Exercise 1-9

Page 9: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-4 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1

General Characteristics of the M9 Pistol

Role The M9 pistol provides timely and accurate fire in a close combat situation

and as a means of defense for personnel assigned �� The M9 pistol as their primary weapon �� To crew served weapons

Major Components

The diagram below identifies the major components of the M9 pistol.

Continued on next page

Page 10: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-5 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1

General Characteristics of the M9 Pistol, Continued

Description The diagram below shows the major parts for the M9 pistol.

Item Part

1 Firing Pin Block 2 Extractor/Loaded Chamber Indicator 3 Trigger 4 Front Sight 5 Slide Assembly 6 Disassembly Lever 7 Slide Stop 8 Rear Sight 9 Decocking/Safety Lever 10 Hammer 11 Receiver 12 Grip 13 Lanyard Loop 14 Magazine 15 Magazine Catch Assembly 16 Disassembly Button

Weight The following table lists the approximate weight (in ounces) of the M9 pistol.

Item Weight (lbs) M9 pistol (with 15-round magazine) 2.54 M9 pistol (with empty magazine) 2.12

Continued on next page

Page 11: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-6 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1

General Characteristics of the M9 Pistol, Continued

Length The following table lists the length (in inches) of the M9 pistol.

Item Length (in inches) Barrel length 4.92 Length of gun, overall 8.54

Range The following table lists the range (in meters) for the M9 pistol.

Type of Range Range (in meters) Maximum Effective 50 Maximum Range 1800

Muzzle Velocity The muzzle velocity of the M9 pistol is 1230.3 feet per second.

Safety Mechanisms

The M9 pistol is equipped with two safety mechanisms described below: �� The manual decocking/safety lever, located on the slide, which separates

the firing pin from the hammer, lowers the hammer when cocked, and interrupts the connection between trigger and sear.

�� The firing pin block prevents any motion of the firing pin and is overcome

only by pulling on the trigger.

Page 12: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-7 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1

Cycle of Operation of the M9 Pistol

Operation The cycle of operation for the M9 pistol consists of the following eight steps:

Step Action Description 1 Feeding The recoil spring moves the slide forward

feeding the next cartridge from the magazine into the chamber.

2 Chambering The slide continues forward and the case head slides up the breech face and under the extractor. The round is now chambered with the extractor positioned in the groove of the cartridge case.

3 Locking The locking block is cammed upward forming one mechanical unit. Forward motion ceases as the disassembly latch bolt stops the locking block.

4 Firing Pressure developed by combustion gases recoils the slide and barrel assembly to the rear.

5 Unlocking Recoiling a short distance, the locking block plunger forces the locking lugs on the locking block to swing down out of the recesses in the slide.

6 Extracting The slide extracts and ejects the cartridge case.

7 Ejecting The extractor carries the case to the rear and the head of the case strikes the fixed ejector which pivots the case and ejects it from the pistol.

8 Cocking As the slide ejects the cartridge, the hammer is cocked.

Page 13: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-8 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1

Ammunition for the M9 Pistol

Standard Ammunition

The standard ammunition for the M9 pistol is the NATO M882 9mm ball round, as shown below.

Caution: Do not fire �� Heavily corroded or dented cartridges �� Cartridges with loose bullets �� Other defective rounds as detected by visual inspection

Page 14: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-9 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete exercise items 1 through 4 by performing the action required.

Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 The M9 pistol provides

a. rapid, accurate fire in long-range situations. b. rapid, accurate fire in close combat. c. timely, accurate fire in long-range situations. d. timely, accurate fire in close combat.

Item 2 What is the weight (in pounds) of the M9 service pistol with 15 round

magazine? a. 2.00 b. 2.50 c. 2.54 d. 3.00

Item 3 What is the fourth step in the cycle of operation of the M9 pistol?

a. Locking b. Firing c. Unlocking d. Extracting

Item 4 What is the standard ammunition used for the M9 pistol?

a. Any 9mm cartridge b. 9mm armor piercing NATO round c. 9mm, ball, NATO M882 d. 9mm tracer NATO round

Continued on next page

Page 15: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-10 Study Unit 1, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 d 1-4 2 c 1-5 3 b 1-7 4 c 1-8

Page 16: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-11 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2

LESSON 2

CLEARING, DISASSEMBLING, AND CLEANING THE M9 PISTOL

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson teaches you how to clear, disassemble, and clean the M9 pistol.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the steps to clear the M9 pistol. �� Identify the steps to disassemble the M9 pistol. �� Identify the cleaner/lubricant used on the M9 pistol. �� Identify the steps for the care and cleaning of the M9 pistol.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.

Topic See Page

Introduction 1-11 Clearing the M9 Pistol 1-12 Disassembling the M9 Pistol 1-13 Cleaning the M9 Pistol 1-19 Lesson 2 Exercise 1-22

Page 17: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-12 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2

Clearing the M9 Pistol

Procedures Before you begin to disassemble the M9 pistol, you must clear it to be sure it

is completely safe. The five steps to clear the M9 pistol are listed in the table below.

Step Action

1 Place the weapon on safe by rotating the ambidextrous thumb safety to the down position.

2 Remove the magazine by pressing the magazine release button in. Catch the magazine as it falls from the pistol.

3 Pull the slide to the rear with your left hand and lock it in place by pushing up on the slide stop with your right thumb.

4 Inspect the chamber by tilting the weapon up so you can see into the chamber and be sure no rounds are present.

5 Release the slide and allow it to return to the forward position.

Page 18: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-13 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2

Disassembling the M9 Pistol

Operator Disassembly

After you clear the M9 pistol, you may begin disassembly into main groups for cleaning and inspection. The four main groups are the �� Slide group �� Recoil spring and guide group �� Barrel group �� Magazine group �� Receiver group

Component Parts

The diagram below shows the components of the M9 pistol.

Continued on next page

Page 19: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-14 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2

Disassembling the M9 Pistol, Continued

Slide Groups From the Receiver

The following table lists the steps for removing the slide, barrel, and recoil spring and guide groups from the receiver.

Step Action

1 Depress the disassembly button (as shown in picture below) located on the right hand side of the receiver just above the front strap of the trigger guard. Extend your forefinger along the receiver until you can depress the button. Once you have depressed the button, hold it in that position.

2 Rotate the disassembly lever. Now, with the thumb of the left hand, rotate the disassembly lever clockwise and down (as shown in picture below). The lever will rotate 90 degrees to a solid stop. Now you can relax the pressure on the disassembly button.

Continued on next page

Page 20: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-15 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2

Disassembling the M9 Pistol, Continued

Slide Groups, continued

Step Action

3 Once the disassembly lever comes to a stop, you will hear a click and the slide will jump forward slightly. The slide is now unlocked from the receiver. With your left hand, grasp the slide and pull it (along with the barrel, recoil spring, and guide) forward off the receiver as shown in the picture below. Now set the receiver aside since nothing more can be removed from it.

Continued on next page

Page 21: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-16 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2

Disassembling the M9 Pistol, Continued

Recoil Spring and Guide

The following table lists the steps to remove the recoil spring and guide from the slide.

Step Action

1 Cradle the slide upside down in your left hand and compress the recoil spring with your right thumb (as shown in the picture below).

2 Once the spring is compressed, lift up on the rear of the guide (as shown in picture below) and pull the spring and guide from the slide.

3 Now you can separate the spring from the guide.

Page 22: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-17 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2

Disassembling the M9 Pistol Magazine

Magazine Group

The following table lists the steps to disassemble the M9 pistol magazine.

Step Action

1 Grasp the magazine with the back of the magazine tube against the palm of the hand.

2 Use a 9mm round to depress the locking block plunger protruding

from the floorplate and slide floorplate away from you.

3 Maintain pressure on the magazine spring with the thumb remove the floorplate, spring, and follower from magazine tube.

Page 23: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-18 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2

Cleaning the M9 Pistol

Cleaners and Lubricants

To be sure that your M9 pistol works correctly, keep it clean and properly lubricated. Note: Your cleaning equipment can be either a regular rifle cleaning brush

(toothbrush) or a bore brush and cleaning rod. The following table lists authorized cleaners/lubricants and their use on the M9 pistol.

Cleaners/Lubricants Use

Cleaner, Lubricant, Preservative (CLP)

Cleans, lubricates, and preserves at temperatures down to –35°F Note: CLP is the most commonly

used cleaning/lubricant for cleaning the M9 pistol.

Lubricant, Arctic Weather (LAW) Lubricates at extremely cold temperatures (below 0°F)

Caution: Do not use any dry cleaning solvent that contains acid to clean

grease, oil, or corrosion-preventive compounds from the M9 pistol.

Purpose of Cleaning

You must clean the M9 pistol after you have fired it because firing produces deposits of primer fouling, powder ashes, carbon, and metal fouling. These deposits collect and promote rust if you do not remove them. The cleaning procedures described on the next page enable you to remove all deposits except metal fouling. Note: Only the unit armorer is authorized to remove metal fouling. Caution: Report all burred, worn, cracked defective parts to your unit

armorer for correction.

Continued on next page

Page 24: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-19 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2

Cleaning the M9 Pistol, Continued

Cleaning the Bore

The following table lists the steps to clean the bore of the M9 pistol.

Step Action

1 Attach the bore brush to the cleaning rod. Insert the brush in the bore and move it back and forth in the bore to loosen carbon deposits. Repeat this step until a dry cleaning patch pulled through the bore exits clean.

2 Attach a clean, dry cleaning patch to the cleaning rod. 3 Moisten the cleaning patch thoroughly with CLP. 4 Pull the patch through the bore several times and inspect the patch.

Repeat this step until the patch shows no fouling. 5 Inspect bore for pitting or obstruction, blocking block moves

freely and there are no cracks or burrs visible.

Cleaning the Slide Assembly

The following table lists the steps to clean the bore of the M9 pistol.

Step Action

1 Moisten a soft brush with CLP and remove excess dirt and carbon buildup around the decocking lever, breech face, extractor, and slide guides.

2 Wipe dry with a cloth and apply a light coat of CLP. 3 Inspect the slide assembly for free movement of safety lever and

firing pin block. Check the rear sight for looseness or cracks.

Continued on next page

Page 25: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-20 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2

Cleaning the M9 Pistol, Continued

Cleaning the Receiver Assembly

The following table lists the steps to clean the receiver of the M9 pistol.

Step Action

1 Wipe the receiver assembly clean with cloth or soft brush paying attention to the disassembly lever, trigger, slide stop, hammer, and magazine release button.

2 Apply a light coat of CLP. 3 Inspect the receiver assembly for checks or chips. The free

movement of slide stop and magazine catch assembly. Look for excessive wear and burrs on the guide rails.

Extreme Environments

Take extra precautions to be sure the M9 pistol operates trouble free in extreme environments. Refer to the table below for precautions to take in different environments.

Type of Climate Care/Cleaning Prevents

Hot Inspect/clean daily Moisture and rust Humid Inspect daily Moisture and rust Hot, dry, sandy Clean and lubricate

daily Rust and corrosion

Remove excess oil Sluggish operation Keep weapon free of moisture

Rust and corrosion Below freezing

Keep the M9 temperature close to the outside temperature

Moisture and rust

Page 26: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-21 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

10 minutes

Directions Complete exercise items 1 through 8 by performing the action required.

Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 To clear the M9 pistol, place the weapon on safe, __________________, lock

the slide to the rear, inspect the chamber, and release the slide to return to forward position. a. remove the handguard b. inspect the breech c. remove the magazine d. remove the ammunition from the chamber

Item 2 After you have cleared the M9 pistol, what is the first step to disassemble the

pistol? a. Slide the assembly off the receiver track. b. Depress the disassembly button. c. Inspect the chamber. d. Place weapon on safe.

Item 3 What is the most commonly authorized cleaner/lubricant used on the M9

pistol? a. CLP b. LSA c. LAW d. RBC

Continued on next page

Page 27: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-22 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Items 4 Through 7

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the steps to clean the M9 pistol from column 2 in the correct sequence for cleaning the M9 pistol bore in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 Correct Sequence

Column 2 Steps to Clean the M9 pistol Bore

___ 4. ___ 5. ___ 6. ___ 7.

a. Moisten the cleaning patch thoroughly with CLP.

b. Attach the bore brush to the cleaning rod. Insert the brush in the bore and move it back and forth in the bore to loosen carbon deposits.

c. Attach a clean, dry cleaning patch to the cleaning rod.

d. Pull the cleaning patch through the bore several times until it shows no fouling.

Item 8 To prevent rust and corrosion in a hot, dry, sandy climate, you should

a. Remove excess oil and keep the M9 pistol temperature close to the

outside temperature. b. Clean and lubricate daily. c. Keep weapon free of moisture and remove excess oil. d. Remove excess oil and keep muzzle and receiver covered.

Continued on next page

Page 28: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-23 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 c 1-12 2 b 1-14 3 a 1-18 4 b 1-19 5 c 1-19 6 a 1-19 7 d 1-19 8 b 1-20

Page 29: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-24 Study Unit 1, Lesson 2 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 30: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-25 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

LESSON 3

ASSEMBLING, STOPPAGES, AND IMMEDIATE ACTION FOR THE M9 PISTOL

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson teaches you how to assemble, identify stoppages and their causes,

and perform immediate action on the M9 pistol.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson you should be able to �� Identify the steps to assemble the M9 pistol. �� Identify the steps to perform a function check on M9 pistol. �� Identify the steps to load the M9 pistol. �� Identify the method to engage targets with the M9 pistol. �� Identify stoppages and their causes on the M9 pistol. �� Identify the steps for immediate action on the M9 pistol.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics.

Topic See Page Introduction 1-25 Assembling the M9 Pistol 1-26 Performing a Function Check on M9 Pistol 1-30 Loading the M9 Pistol 1-31 Engaging Targets with the M9 Pistol 1-33 Stoppages of the M9 Pistol 1-36 Immediate Action for the M9 Pistol 1-37 Lesson 3 Exercise 1-38

Page 31: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-26 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

Assembling the M9 Pistol

Procedure After you have cleaned your M9 pistol, you are ready to assemble your

weapon. To assemble the M9 pistol, replace the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. �� Install the barrel into the slide. �� Install the recoil spring and guide into the slide. �� Install the slide, barrel, and recoil spring and guide onto the receiver. �� Assemble magazine for M9 pistol.

Installing the Barrel into the Slide

The following table lists the steps to install the barrel into the slide.

Step Action

1 Cradle the barrel upside down in your left hand. Push forward until the muzzle barely protrudes from the slide.

2 Grasp the locking block lightly between the thumb and forefinger

of your right hand. 3 Insert the barrel, muzzle first, into the slide. 4 Make sure the locking lugs engage the locking lug shoulders of the

bolt. Push the barrel slightly rearward to lock it into position.

Continued on next page

Page 32: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-27 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

Assembling the M9 Pistol, Continued

Installing the Recoil Spring and Guide into the Slide

The following table lists the steps to install the recoil spring and guide into the slide.

Step Action

1 Fully insert the recoil spring on the spring guide.

2 Insert the free end of the spring into the spring recess in the front of the slide.

3 Compress the spring slightly; rotate the guide, head down, until it rests in the guide groove. Make sure the guide fits snugly in the groove.

Continued on next page

Page 33: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-28 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

Assembling the M9 Pistol, Continued

Installing the Slide, Barrel, and Recoil Spring and Guide onto the Receiver

The following table lists the steps to install the slide, barrel, and recoil spring and guide onto the receiver.

Step Action

1 Pick up the receiver. If the hammer is cocked, gently lower it until it meets the receiver frame.

2 Grasp the front section of the slide with your left hand, placing your thumb on the recoil spring and guide so the spring and guide do not become misaligned with the locking block.

3 Carefully guide the rear portion of the slide rails onto the front portion of the receiver rails.

4 When the rails are well engaged, push the slide all the way against the hammer, pushing the hammer slightly rearward.

5 Rotate the wing of the disassembly lever counterclockwise to its closed position. As soon as you rotate the lever, the recoil spring guide (under pressure from the spring) should force the disassembly lever up with a loud click.

6 To verify correct assembly, pull the slide back and release it. It should close energetically.

Continued on next page

Page 34: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-29 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

Assembling the M9 Pistol, Continued

Assemble Magazine

The following table lists the steps to assemble the 15 round magazines used with the M9 pistol.

Step Action

1 Insert the follower into the top coil of the magazine spring.

Notes: The top coil has an upward and forward pointing end. Ensure that the notches on follower and magazine tube are on

the same side. 2 Insert the spring into the magazine tube. 3 Attach the floorplate retainer to the bottom coil of the spring. Slide the

floorplate over the retainer, locking it in place.

Page 35: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-30 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check on the M9 Pistol

Purpose After you have assembled your M9 pistol, perform a function check to ensure

the M9 pistol is performing properly.

Procedure The table below list the steps to perform a function check on the M9 pistol.

Step Action 1 Insert an empty magazine into the pistol and ensure that the magazine

catch locks the magazine in place. 2 Retract the slide to the rear, ensuring the magazine's slide stop locks

slide assembly to the rear. 3 Ensure the safety lever is in the safe position (down). Depress the

slide stop and allow the slide to return forward. Observe that the hammer is in the forward position.

4 Squeeze and release trigger. Observe that firing pin block moves up and down. The hammer should not move.

5 Place the safety lever in fire position (up). 6 Squeeze the trigger. The hammer should cock and fall (double action). 7 Squeeze the trigger again and hold it to the rear. Move the slide to the

rear and release. Release the trigger. You should hear a click and the hammer should not fall.

Page 36: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-31 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

Loading the M9 Pistol

Procedures The M9 pistol can fire any time the trigger is pulled with the safety lever in

the fire position and a round in the chamber. The following table lists the steps to load the M9 pistol.

Step Action 1 Insert a loaded magazine into the magazine well of the pistol until a

click of the magazine catch is heard.

2 Pointing the pistol in a safe direction, grasp the serrated portion of the slide and retract the slide to the rear.

3 Release the slide, allowing a round from the magazine to be chambered.

Continued on next page

Page 37: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-32 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

Loading the M9 Pistol, Continued

Load M9 magazine

The following table lists the steps to load a 15-round magazine used by the M9 pistol.

Step Action 1 Place a cartridge on the magazine follower in front of the lips.

2 Press down and slide the cartridge completely back under the lips. 3 Repeat these steps until the magazine is fully loaded.

Page 38: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-33 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

Engaging Targets with the M9 Pistol

Introduction The weapon must become an extension of the hand and arm. To accurately

engage targets with the M9 pistol, you must be familiar with griping, aiming and firing position of the M9 pistol.

Grip the M9 Pistol

A proper grip is one of the most important fundamentals in firing the M9 pistol. The two-hand grip used to fire the M9 pistol allows the firer to steady the firing hand and provide maximum support during firing. Position your hand as stated in the below table.

Hand Fingers Non-firing Hold the weapon.

Firing Form a V with the thumb and forefinger and place the weapon in the V with the front and rear sights in line with the firing arm.

Firing Wrap the lower three fingers around the pistol grip, putting equal pressure with all three fingers to the rear.

Firing Allow the thumb to rest alongside the weapon without pressure and grip the weapon.

Note: The hand should not tremble.

Non-firing Wrap the fingers around the firing hand, ensuring that the index finger is between the middle finger of the firing hand and trigger guard.

Non-firing Rest the thumb alongside the firing thumb WARNING: If the thumb is placed in the rear

of the weapon the recoil could result in personal injury.

Continued on next page

Page 39: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-34 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

Engaging Targets with the M9 Pistol, Continued

Aiming Aiming is the proper sight alignment and sight placement of the M9 pistol on

the target.

Sight Alignment

The front blade sight of the M9 pistol is centered and leveled with the top of the rear sight notch. Note: See picture below.

Sight Placement

The position of the weapon’s sights on the target as seen by the firer. Proper sight placement is the correct sight alignment with the front sight post center mass on the target. Note: See picture below.

Proper Sight Alignment and Sight Placement

The picture below shows the proper alignment and placement of the M9 sight on a target.

Continued on next page

Page 40: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-35 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

Engaging Targets with the M9 Pistol, Continued

Firing Position for M9 Pistol

The standing firing position is used to engage targets with the M9 pistol. To ensure quick response to dangerously close targets, it must be practiced so it becomes natural. The standing position is illustrated and described in the table below.

Body / Feet Arms �� Face the target �� Extend the firing arm �� Feet shoulder width apart �� Wrist and elbow of the firing

arm are locked and pointed toward target center.

�� Body straight with the shoulders slightly forward of the buttocks

Page 41: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-36 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

Stoppages of the M9 Pistol

Definition A stoppage is the unintentional interruption in the function or failure to fire of

the M9 pistol.

Failure to Fire Failure of the M9 pistol to fire can be can be a result of the following:

�� Hangfire. A delay in the functioning of a propelling charge explosive

train at the time of firing. �� Misfire. A complete failure to fire. A misfire itself is not dangerous but

since it cannot be immediately distinguished from a hangfire you must consider it a hangfire until proven otherwise.

Unintentional Interruptions

The table below lists common interruptions that may be experienced with the M9.

Stoppage Cause

Stovepipe Occurs when the weapon fails to completely eject the casing.

Double feed Occurs when two rounds are stuck in the receiver.

Slide not fully seated Caused by a number of reasons, as simple as dirty ammunition or a dirty pistol.

Audible pop or reduced recoil

Occurs when only a portion of the propellant is ignited.

Page 42: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-37 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3

Immediate Action for the M9 Pistol

Definition Immediate action is the prompt action taken by the user to correct a stoppage,

without attempting to discover the cause.

Procedure Since it’s important that immediate action become instinctive, the following

table lists the steps to perform immediate action on the M9 pistol.

Step Action 1 TAP – Slap the bottom of the magazine upward to ensure it is fully

seated. 2 RACK – Pull the slide all the way to the rear and release it to

ensure a round is chambered. 3 BANG – Sight and attempt to fire. If immediate action was

successful, the pistol will fire. Note: If the M9 pistol fails to fire in a non-tactical situation, clear

the pistol and determine cause of the stoppage.

Page 43: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-38 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete exercise items 1 through 6 by performing the action required.

Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What is the first step in assembling the M9 pistol?

a. Install the barrel into the slide. b. The first step is identical to disassembly. c. Install the recoil spring. d. Grasp the locking lugs.

Item 2 What step checks that the M9 pistol’s hammer cocks and falls (double action)

when performing a function check? a. Two b. Five c. Six d. Seven

Item 3 When loading the M9 pistol, ensure the pistol is pointing

a. in a safe direction. b. at the target. c. at six o’clock. d. at 45 degrees.

Continued on next page

Page 44: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-39 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 The M9 pistol is held with the ___________when engaging a target.

a. firing hand b. non-firing hand c. firm grip d. thumb and forefinger

Item 5 A stoppage is defined as

a. improperly loaded ammunition into the weapon. b. any unintentional interruption in the functioning of the weapon. c. waiting for 40 seconds and clearing the weapon. d. having an ammunition casing stuck in the breech.

Item 6 What are the three steps for immediate action?

a. TAP, RACK, PULL b. HIT, PULL, TAP c. PULL, RACK, BANG d. TAP, RACK, BANG

Continued on next page

Page 45: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 1-40 Study Unit 1, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 a 1-26 2 c 1-30 3 a 1-31 4 b 1-33 5 b 1-36 6 d 1-37

Page 46: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-1 Study Unit 2

STUDY UNIT 2

M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER

Overview

Estimated Study Time

2 hours, 15 minutes

Unit Scope This study unit teaches you the characteristics, operation, maintenance,

immediate action, care and cleaning techniques, and firing procedures for the M203 grenade launcher.

Learning Objectives

After completing this unit, you should be able to �� Identify the capabilities of the M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify the procedures for maintaining the M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify the methods for firing the M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify stoppages and their causes. �� Identify criteria for employing the M203 grenade launcher.

In This Study Unit

This study unit contains the following lessons:

Topic See Page

Lesson 1 Description 2-3 Lesson 2 Clearing, Disassembling, and Cleaning 2-13 Lesson 3 Assembling, Conducting the Function Check and

Firing 2-23

Lesson 4 Stoppages, Immediate Action, and Employment 2-39

Page 47: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-2 Study Unit 2

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 48: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-3 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1

LESSON 1

DESCRIPTION

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope The objective of this lesson is to teach you the basic characteristics of the

M203 grenade launcher and the ammunition it uses.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the capabilities of the M203 grenade launcher. �� Describe the principal characteristics of the M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify the standard types of ammunition for the M203 grenade launcher

based on color and use.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page

Introduction 2-3 Role and Capabilities 2-4 General Characteristics 2-5 Ammunition 2-7 Lesson 1 Exercise 2-10

Page 49: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-4 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1

Role and Capabilities

Role The M203 grenade launcher supports the fire team in both the offense and the

defense by providing close fire support over the entire team sector of fire.

Capabilities The four capabilities of the M203 are to

�� Destroy groups of enemy personnel �� Fire on enemy troops and automatic weapons that are in defilade �� Provide close fire support in the assault �� Supplement other supporting fires

Page 50: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-5 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1

General Characteristics

Components The diagram below shows the M203 grenade launcher and its major

components attached to the M16A2 service rifle.

Weight The following table lists the approximate weight (in pounds) of the M203

grenade launcher and the M16A2 rifle.

Item Weight (in pounds) M203 Grenade Launcher 3 M16A2 Rifle 6.5

Range The following table lists the range (in meters) for the M203 grenade launcher.

Type of Range Range (in meters) Maximum 400 Maximum Effective Area Target: 350

Point Target: 150 Minimum Safe Training: 165

Combat: 31

Continued on next page

Page 51: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-6 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1

General Characteristics, Continued

Description The eight characteristics of the M203 grenade launcher are listed below.

�� Lightweight �� Single-shot �� Breech loaded �� Pump action (sliding barrel) �� Shoulder-fired �� Attaches to the M16A2 rifle �� Fires a 40mm grenade

Page 52: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-7 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1

Ammunition

Ammunition Types

The 40mm grenade cartridge used in the M203 is a fixed-type ammunition, consisting of two major assemblies, the cartridge case and the projectile. The standard types of ammunition used with the M203 grenade launcher are described in the following table by color and use.

Type Color Used to Danger

Radius High explosive (HE)

Engage enemy ��Automatic

weapon positions ��Personnel dug into

fighting positions

130 meters

High explosive airburst (HE airburst)

Engage enemy ��Personnel on the

move ��Troops in the open

27 meters

High explosive dual purpose (HEDP)

Engage enemy ��Automatic

weapon positions ��Crew-served

weapon positions

130 meters

Continued on next page

Page 53: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-8 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1

Ammunition, Continued

Ammunition Types, continued

Type Color Used to Danger Radius

CS gas

Provide chemical effects (including temporary nausea, tearing of eyes, and intense coughing) against enemy troops

N/A

Multipurpose (Buckshot)

Engage enemy personnel in the open. When firing, aim at the foot of the target.

N/A

Training practice (TP)

Train grenadiers 20 meters Note: Fuze arms between 14 to 27 meters.

Continued on next page

Page 54: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-9 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1

Ammunition, Continued

Ammunition Types, continued

Type Color Used to Danger Radius

Training practice (TP)

Train grenadiers Completely inert and contains no fuze.

Illuminating Light up area N/A

Signaling

Mark ground N/A

Signaling

Mark ground N/A

Page 55: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-10 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 3 by performing the actions required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What is one capability of the M203 grenade launcher?

a. Support and deliver enemy fires b. Destroy soft-skinned vehicles c. Supplement other supporting fires d. Provide enemy fire support

Item 2 The maximum range of the M203 grenade launcher is ______ meters.

a. 150 b. 350 c. 400 d. 460

Item 3 The standard types of ammunition used with the M203 are high explosive,

high explosive airburst, high explosive dual purpose, CS gas, and a. variable time. b. white phosphorous. c. training practice. d. variable inert.

Continued on next page

Page 56: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-11 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 c 2-4 2 c 2-5 3 c 2-8

Page 57: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-12 Study Unit 2, Lesson 1 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 58: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-13 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2

LESSON 2

CLEARING, DISASSEMBLING, AND CLEANING

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope The objective of this lesson is to teach you how to clear, disassemble, and

clean the M203 grenade launcher.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the steps to clear the M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify the steps to disassemble the M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify the cleaners/lubricant used for the M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify steps for the care and cleaning of the M203 grenade.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 2-13 Clearing 2-14 Disassembling 2-15 Cleaning 2-17 Lesson 2 Exercise 2-20

Page 59: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-14 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2

Clearing

Steps Before you begin to disassemble the M203 grenade launcher, you must clear

the weapon to be sure it is completely safe. The following table lists the steps to clear the M203 grenade launcher.

Step Action

1 Place the weapon on safe by lowering the safety located inside the trigger guard.

2 Depress the barrel latch

3 Slide the barrel assembly forward.

4 Inspect the breech.

Page 60: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-15 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2

Disassembling

Procedure The table below lists the steps to disassemble the M203 grenade launcher.

Step Action 1 Remove the quadrant sight by loosening the knurled screw on the

right side of weapon.

2 Remove the handguard and sight assembly by

�� Pushing down on the slip ring of the rifle. �� Lifting up on hand guard and pulling it to the rear.

Continued on next page

Page 61: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-16 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Procedure, continued

Step Action 3 Depress the barrel latch and slide the barrel assembly forward.

4 Insert one end of a cleaning rod section into the hole and depress the barrel stop.

5 Slide barrel assembly off the receiver track.

Page 62: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-17 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2

Cleaning

Purpose for Cleaning

You must clean the M203 grenade launcher after you have fired to remove powder ash and carbon fouling. These deposits will collect and promote rust. Note: Only the unit armorer is authorized to remove metal fouling. Report

all burred, worn, cracked, or defective parts to your unit armorer

Cleaners and Lubricants

To be sure that your M203 grenade launcher works correctly, keep it clean and properly lubricated. Note: Your cleaning equipment can be either a regular rifle cleaning brush

(toothbrush) or a bore brush and thong.

Cleaner Lubricant Preservative (CLP) is the only authorized cleaner/lubricant used for the M203 grenade launcher. CAUTION: Do not use dry cleaning solvent that contains acid when you

clean grease, oil, or corrosion-preventive compounds from the M203 grenade launcher.

Continued on next page

Page 63: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-18 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2

Cleaning, Continued

Cleaning the Bore

The following table lists the steps to clean the bore of the M203 grenade launcher assembly.

Step Action

1 Attach a clean, dry rag (the size of a handkerchief) to the thong. 2 Moisten the rag thoroughly with CLP. 3 Pull the rag through the bore several times; inspect the rag. Repeat

this step until the rag shows no fouling. 4 Attach the bore brush to the thong and pull it through the bore

several times as shown in the picture below. Repeat this step until a dry rag pulled through the bore exits clean.

Continued on next page

Page 64: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-19 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2

Cleaning, Continued

Procedure The following table lists the steps to clean the chamber of the M203 grenade

launcher.

Step Action 1 Clean area around the breech insert and firing pin hole.

2 Wipe the locator slot with a clean rag

Extreme Environments

Take extra precautions to make sure the M203 grenade launcher operates trouble free in extreme environments. Refer to the table below for actions to take in different environments.

Type of Climate Care/Cleaning Prevents Hot Inspect daily/lubricate Moisture and rust Humid Dry, clean and lubricate as

necessary Moisture and rust

Hot, dry, sandy ��Clean lubricate daily and wipe dry

��Keep muzzle and receiver covered

��Rust and corrosion ��Sand and dust in the

bore

Below freezing ��Remove excess oil ��Keep weapon free of

moisture ��Keep the M203 temperature

close to the outside temperature

��Sluggish operation ��Rust and corrosion ��Moisture and rust

Salt water atmosphere

Inspect daily/lubricate Moisture and rust

Page 65: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-20 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

10 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 8 by performing the actions required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What is the fourth step to clear the M203 grenade launcher?

1. Place the weapon on safe. 2. Depress the barrel latch. 3. Slide the barrel assembly forward. 4. a. Remove the handguard. b. Inspect the breech. c. Depress the barrel stop. d. Remove the quadrant sight.

Item 2 What is the first step the gunner must perform when disassembling the M203?

a. Slide the assembly off the receiver track. b. Depress the barrel latch and slide the barrel assembly forward. c. Remove the quadrant sight from carrying handle. d. Remove the handguard assembly.

Item 3 Which is the only authorized cleaner/lubricant used on the M203 grenade

launcher? a. CLP b. LSA c. LAW d. RBC

Continued on next page

Page 66: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-21 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Items 4 Through 7

Matching: In the sequence and the space provided, place the letter of the steps to clean the M203 grenade launcher assembly from column 2 to column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 Correct Sequence

Column 2 Steps to Clean

___ 4. ___ 5. ___ 6. ___ 7.

a. Moisten the rag thoroughly with CLP.

b. Attach the bore brush to the thong and pull it through the bore several times.

c. Pull the rag through the bore several times until it shows no fouling.

d. Attach a clean, dry rag to the thong.

Item 8 How do you prevent rust, corrosion, sand, and dust in the bore in a hot, dry,

and sandy climate? a. Remove excess oil and keep the M203 temperature close to the outside

temperature. b. Clean and lubricate daily and keep muzzle and receiver covered. c. Keep weapon free of moisture and close to outside temperature. d. Inspect daily.

Continued on next page

Page 67: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-22 Study Unit 2, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 b 2-14 2 c 2-15 3 a 2-17 4 d 2-18 5 a 2-18 6 c 2-18 7 b 2-18 8 b 2-19

Page 68: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-23 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3

LESSON 3

ASSEMBLING, CONDUCTING THE FUNCTION CHECK, AND FIRING

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

30 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses how to assemble, perform a function check, and

accurately fire the M203 grenade launcher.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the steps to assemble the M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify the steps to perform a function check on the M203 grenade

launcher. �� Identify the steps to load M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify the three methods to firing the M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify the steps to adjust the sight leaf on the M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify the steps to adjust the quadrant sight on the M203 grenade

launcher.

Continued on next page

Page 69: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-24 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3

Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 2-23 Assembling 2-25 Performing a Function Check 2-26 Loading 2-28 Firing 2-29 Adjusting and Operating the Leaf Sight 2-30 Adjust and Operating the Quadrant Sight 2-33 Lesson 3 Exercise 2-35

Page 70: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-25 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3

Assembling

Procedure After you have cleaned your M203 grenade launcher, you are ready to

assemble your weapon. To assemble the M203 grenade launcher, replace the parts in the reverse order of disassembly as shown in the table below.

Step Action

1 Depress the barrel stop and slide the barrel assembly onto the receiver and close.

2 Install the handguards and secure them with the slip ring.

3 Mount the quadrant sight bracket and the quadrant sight assembly on the carrying handle of the service rifle. Tighten the mounting screw.

Page 71: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-26 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check

Purpose Perform a function check to be sure that your M203 grenade launcher works.

The areas you must inspect to perform a function check are the �� Safety and trigger �� Barrel stop and barrel latch

Safety and Trigger

To check the safety and trigger follow the steps listed in the table below: Step Action Result

1 Cock the launcher and squeeze the trigger.

You should hear the firing pin release.

2 Hold the trigger to rear and cock the launcher.

N/A

3 Release the trigger and then squeeze trigger again.

Firing pin should release.

4 Cock the launcher and check that the safety moves to the safe and fire positions.

Doing this checks that the sear is functioning properly to ensure launcher does not accidentally fire. Note: The launcher must

be cocked before the safety can be placed in the safe position.

Continued on next page

Page 72: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-27 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check, Continued

Barrel Stop and Barrel Latch

Move the barrel forward and backward. Check that the stop and latch function properly, locking the barrel open and closed.

Page 73: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-28 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3

Loading

Procedure To load the M203 grenade launcher, follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action

1 Move the safety to the safe position.

2 Press the barrel latch and slide the barrel forward.

3 Insert ammunition into the chamber.

4 Slide the barrel closed until it locks.

Page 74: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-29 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3

Firing

Three Methods The three methods of firing the M203 grenade launcher are the

�� Rifle sight methods �� Leaf sight method �� Quadrant sight method

Rifle Sight Method

To engage targets under 50 meters, lower the leaf sight and use the rifle sights, aiming at the foot of the target, as shown below.

Continued on next page

Page 75: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-30 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3

Firing, Continued

Leaf Sight Method

To engage targets between 50 and 250 meters, use the leaf sight and front sight post of the M16A2 rifle as shown below.

Continued on next page

Page 76: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-31 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3

Firing, Continued

Adjust Leaf Sight

To adjust leaf sight, follow the steps in the table below. Step Action

1 To change the range of point of impact, loosen the elevation adjustment screw and adjust the leaf sight as follows: �� To increase the range, raise the leaf sight. �� To decrease range, lower the leaf sight. Notes: One increment equals 10 meters at 200 meters. Use the rim of a used 40-mm cartridge to turn the

elevation adjustment screw. 2 To change the point of impact horizontally, turn the sight windage

screw �� Clockwise to adjust for wind from the left. �� Counterclockwise to adjust for wind from the right. Note: One increment equals 1.5 meters at 200 meters.

Continued on next page

Page 77: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-32 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3

Firing, Continued

Leaf Sight Components

The components of the sight leaf are illustrated in the picture below.

Leaf Sight Picture Alignment

Align the target with the 200-meter range increment of the sight leaf and the front sight post.

Continued on next page

Page 78: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-33 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3

Firing, Continued

Quadrant Sight Method

The gunner uses the quadrant sight to engage targets from 50 to 400 meters.

Adjusting the Quadrant Sight

To adjust the quadrant sight, follow the steps in the table below.

Step Action 1 To adjust elevation, pull the latch on the quadrant sight arm

toward you and release it at the selected elevation. Note: One notch equals 5 meters at 200 meters.

2 To adjust for headwind and rear wind, turn the front sight post. �� Left to increase range. �� Right to decrease range.

3 To adjust for left and right wind �� Depress the retainer and slide the rear aperture in to adjust

for wind from the right. �� Slide the rear aperture out to adjust for wind from the left. Note: The vertical line marks the center. One notch equals

1.5 meters at 200 meters.

Continued on next page

Page 79: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-34 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3

Firing, Continued

Quadrant Sight The diagram below shows the quadrant sight and its major components.

Quadrant Sight Alignment

Align front sight post of quadrant sight and M16A2 front sight post, centered within rear aperture on the quadrant sight arm.

Page 80: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-35 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 5 by performing the action required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What are the steps the gunner must perform to assemble the M203 grenade

launcher? a. The reverse steps of disassembly b. Same steps as disassembly c. The quickest method d. Steps according to unit SOP

Item 2 The areas to inspect while performing a function check on the M203 grenade

launcher are the barrel stop, barrel latch, trigger, and the a. breech assembly. b. receiver tracks. c. quadrant sight assembly. d. safety.

Item 3 What is the first step to load the M203 grenade launcher?

a. Slide the barrel forward. b. Move the safety to safety position. c. Set range on leaf sight. d. Cock weapon.

Continued on next page

Page 81: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-36 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 The gunner uses leaf sight method of fire to engage to engage targets at what

ranges in meters? a. 50-150 b. 50-400 c. 50-300 d. 50-250

Item 5 To adjust the elevation adjustment screw on M203 leaf sight, the gunner uses

a a. screwdriver. b. multipurpose tool. c. used 40 mm cartridge. d. cleaning rod handle.

Item 6 When engaging targets with the quadrant sight, what must you do to adjust

the elevation or range to target? a. Pull the latch on quadrant sight arm toward you and release at the selected

elevation. b. Move the rear sight aperture right or left. c. Move the front sight post away from or toward the barrel. d. Move the rear sight aperture away from or toward the barrel.

Continued on next page

Page 82: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-37 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 a 2-25 2 d 2-26 3 b 2-28 4 d 2-30 5 c 2-31 6 a 2-33

Page 83: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-38 Study Unit 2, Lesson 3 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 84: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-39 Study Unit 2, Lesson 4

LESSON 4

STOPPAGES, IMMEDIATE ACTION, AND EMPLOYMENT

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope The objective of this lesson is to teach you how to identify stoppages and

their causes, perform immediate action, and identify the offensive and defensive capabilities of the M203 grenade launcher.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Define a stoppage of the M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify the steps for immediate action on the M203 grenade launcher. �� Identify criteria for employing the M203 grenade launcher.

Continued on next page

Page 85: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-40 Study Unit 2, Lesson 4

Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 2-39 Stoppages 2-41 Immediate Action 2-42 Employment 2-43 Lesson 4 Exercise 2-45

Page 86: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-41 Study Unit 2, Lesson 4

Stoppages

Definitions A stoppage is any unintentional interruption in the functioning of the weapon.

A failure to fire can be a �� Hangfire. A hangfire is a delay in the functioning of a propelling charge

explosive train at the time of firing. �� Misfire. A misfire is a complete failure to fire. A misfire itself is not

dangerous but since it cannot be immediately distinguished from a hangfire, you must consider it a hangfire until proven otherwise.

WARNING: The amount of delay for a hangfire is unpredictable. Consider

all stoppages to be hangfires until proven otherwise.

Common Stoppages and Their Causes

The table below lists common M203 grenade launcher stoppages and their causes.

STOPPAGE CHECK FOR HOW TO FIX IT Too much water or oil in back of breech insert

Point weapon up 30 seconds and hand function.

Dirt or residue in firing pin hole

Clean

Dirt in locator slot Clean

Failure to fire

Faulty ammunition Replace. Failure to extract Casing stuck in barrel Remove with rifle

cleaning rod. Failure to chamber Faulty ammunition or

dirty chamber Replace ammunition or clean bore and chamber.

Failure to lock Dirty follower or receiver cavity

See unit armorer.

Page 87: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-42 Study Unit 2, Lesson 4

Immediate Action

Definition Immediate action is the unhesitating application of a probable remedy when

you have not definitely identified the actual cause of a stoppage.

Procedure Because of the possibility of a misfire or hangfire, use caution while you

perform immediate action procedures. To apply immediate action, complete the steps in the following table.

Step Action

1 Shout “Misfire,” keeping the weapon pointed down range. Be sure all Marines are clear of the muzzle. Note: Shouting misfire should apply only to training situations. WARNING: Before you try to remove the ammunition from

the grenade launcher, clear Marines not required for the operation from the vicinity.

2 Wait 30 seconds from the time of failure before opening the breech to unload.

3 Catch the ejected ammunition or reduce the distance of free fall to the ground.

4 Determine if the removed ammunition or the firing mechanism are defective by examining the �� Primer of the ammunition for dents �� Firing mechanism Note: If the primer has not been dented, then the firing

mechanism is at fault. After the cause of the failure to fire has been corrected, reload the ammunition and continue firing.

5 If the primer has been dented, keep the round separate from other ammunition and follow the unit SOP for disposal.

Page 88: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-43 Study Unit 2, Lesson 4

Employment

Trajectory In employing the M203 grenade launcher to its maximum capability, you

must understand the trajectory of rounds, effects of the ammunition, and the methods of firing. At ranges up to 150 meters, the M203 grenade launcher has a relatively flat trajectory. Therefore, you can fire the M203 grenade launcher from your shoulder in the normal manner. However, as the range increases, the height of the trajectory and the time of flight of the projectile increase.

Effects of M203 Grenade Launcher Fire

The effective casualty radius is the radius of a circle around the point of detonation. Since the high explosive grenade has an effective casualty radius of 5 meters, you can expect 50 percent of exposed troops to become casualties.

Offensive Employment

The grenadier can use the M203 grenade launcher offensively to �� Destroy groups of enemy personnel �� Provide close fire support in an assault together with other supporting

fires The fire team leader/grenadier selects targets and delivers the M203 grenade launcher fires during the attack. The grenadier may fire high explosive (HE) ammunition only at targets far enough away so that the exploding HE will not endanger the assaulting squad. In the last 35 meters of an assault (when M203 grenade launcher fires may endanger friendly assaulting troops), the grenadier should employ the multiprojectile antipersonnel ammunition. During an assault, the grenadier can employ the M16A2 rifle until suitable targets appear or until there is time to reload the M203 grenade launcher.

Continued on next page

Page 89: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-44 Study Unit 2, Lesson 4

Employment, Continued

Suitable Targets

Suitable M203 grenade launcher targets are �� Enemy automatic rifle positions �� Machinegun positions �� Other crew-served weapons within the fire team sector

Defensive Employment

Defensively, your firing position should enable you to deliver M203 grenades over the entire team sector. Primary and supplementary positions that you prepare in the defense must provide maximum cover and concealment consistent with the assigned mission. WARNING: You must be sure that fields of fire are cleared of

obstructions that might cause premature detonation of a projectile.

As the enemy approaches your unit’s defensive position, your goal is to subject them to an ever-increasing volume of fire. Initially, you should use your rifle.

Use of Grenade Launcher

As the enemy gets nearer to friendly positions, use your grenade launcher to fire on enemy �� Automatic weapons �� Troops in defilade This will silence an enemy base of fire and cause enemy troops to leave covered positions. Then automatic rifle fire can engage them.

Page 90: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-45 Study Unit 2, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

10 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 6 by performing the actions required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 A stoppage is defined as

a. improperly loaded ammunition into the weapon. b. any unintentional interruption in the functioning of a weapon. c. waiting for 40 seconds and clearing the weapon. d. having an ammunition casing stuck in the breech.

Item 2 Before opening the breech to unload after a misfire, wait

a. 15 seconds. b. 30 seconds. c. 1 minute. d. 3 minutes.

Item 3 To employ the M203 grenade launcher, you must understand the trajectory of

rounds, effects of the ammunition, and a. how to engage targets. b. the methods of firing. c. defensive firing. d. offensive employment.

Continued on next page

Page 91: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-46 Study Unit 2, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 The trajectory of the M203 is relatively flat at ranges up to ______ meters.

a. 100 b. 150 c. 200 d. 250

Item 5 Offensively, in the last 35 meters of an assault, use ______ ammunition in the

M203 grenade launcher. a. HE explosive b. multiprojectile antipersonnel c. TP d. BAW

Item 6 Defensively, be sure fields of fire are cleared of obstructions because they

a. subject you to an increasing volume of fire. b. provide cover and concealment to the enemy. c. might cause premature detonation of a projectile. d. become targets of enemy fire.

Continued on next page

Page 92: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-47 Study Unit 2, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 b 2-41 2 b 2-42 3 b 2-43 4 b 2-43 5 b 2-43 6 c 2-44

Page 93: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 2-48 Study Unit 2, Lesson 4 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank)

Page 94: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-1 Study Unit 3

STUDY UNIT 3

M249 SQUAD AUTOMATIC WEAPON (SAW)

Overview

Estimated Study Time

1 hour, 25 minutes

Unit Scope This study unit will teach you the characteristics, operation, maintenance,

immediate action, care and cleaning techniques, and firing procedures for the M249 squad automatic weapon (SAW).

Learning Objectives

After completing this unit, you should be able to �� Identify the characteristics of the M249 SAW. �� Identify how to maintain the M249 SAW. �� Identify how to engage a target with the M249 SAW. �� Identify how to troubleshoot malfunctions and stoppages on the M249

SAW.

In This Study Unit

This study unit contains the following lessons:

Topic See Page

Lesson 1 Description 3-5 Lesson 2 Clearing, Disassembling, and Cleaning 3-15 Lesson 3 Assembling, Performing the Function Check and

Mounting 3-39

Lesson 4 Using the SAW 3-51

Page 95: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-2 Study Unit 3

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 96: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-3 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1

LESSON 1

DESCRIPTION

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson teaches you the basic characteristics of the M249 squad automatic

weapon (SAW) and the ammunition it uses.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the capabilities of the M249 SAW. �� Describe the characteristic of the M249 SAW. �� Identify the eight steps in the cycle of operation for the M249 SAW. �� Identify the standard types of ammunition for the M249 SAW based on

color and use.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 3-3 Role and Capabilities 3-4 General Characteristics 3-5 Cycle of Operation 3-9 Ammunition 3-10 Lesson 1 Exercise 3-11

Page 97: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-4 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1

Role and Capabilities

Role The M249 squad automatic weapon (SAW) is the fire team’s primary

automatic weapon. The SAW supports the squad in the offense and the defense by providing a heavy volume of suppressive fire.

Capabilities The capabilities of the SAW are listed below.

�� The SAW provides

�� Long-range, close defensive, and final protective fires as part of the squad's defensive lines

�� Close and continuous fire in support of front-line rifle squads �� The SAW supports

�� Rear security and special missions �� The advance of the squad by fire in the offense

�� The SAW supplements other supporting fires.

Page 98: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-5 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1

General Characteristics

M249 Squad Automatic Weapon (SAW)

Below is a picture of the M249 SAW, the only automatic weapon at the squad level to support primary fire team.

Weight The following table lists the approximate weights (in pounds) of the M249

SAW and box of 5.56 ammo.

Item Weight (in pounds) Weapon (with bipod and tools) 17 200-round box (filled) 6.92

Length The length of the M249 SAW is 40.75 inches.

Continued on next page

Page 99: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-6 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1

General Characteristics, Continued

Range The following table lists the range (in meters) for the M249 SAW.

Type of Range Range (in meters) Maximum 600

Area target: 1,000 Point target: 800 Maximum Effective Grazing fire: 600

Rate of Fire The following table lists the rate of fire (in rounds per minute) for the M249

SAW.

Rate of Fire Rounds per Minute Cyclic 850

Sustained 50 Rapid 100

Continued on next page

Page 100: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-7 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1

General Characteristics, Continued

Sights The following table lists the types of sights for the M249 SAW.

Sight Type Front Semi-fixed hooded post

Rear Fully adjustable peep type

Continued on next page

Page 101: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-8 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1

General Characteristics, Continued

Descriptive Characteristics

The M249 SAW is �� Gas-operated. Gas taken from the barrel acts on a piston directly fixed to

the bolt carrier (slide). A single piston controls the gas pressure. �� Air-cooled. The barrel is air-cooled and has a fixed head space. No

special cooling measures are required. The normal outside temperature provides adequate cooling in any climate.

�� Belt- or magazine-fed. The M249 SAW uses a 200-round ammunition

box consisting of a combat mix of linked ammunition under usual conditions. During firing, the links disengage and feeding is continuous. The weapon has an alternate 30-round magazine provision authorized only during emergency situations. Using the 30-round magazine reduces the performance of the weapon.

Note: The M249 SAW fires from the open bolt position. The bolt is a

multiple-lug type that rotates into a positive locked position in the barrel extension before firing.

Page 102: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-9 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1

Cycle of Operation

Eight Steps The cycle of operation for the M249 SAW consists of eight steps shown in

the table below.

Step Action 1 Feeding: Feeding takes place as the operator places a belt of

ammunition on the feed tray or inserts a loaded magazine in the magazine well. A cartridge is placed in the path of the bolt so that as the bolt is driven forward from the force of the expanding driving spring, the face of the bolt makes contact with the rim of the first cartridge and strips it from the links or magazine.

2 Chambering: Occurs as the bolt continues to move forward and forces the cartridge into the barrel chamber.

3 Locking: The locking lugs and bolt face make contact with the rear of the chamber, the forward movement of the bolt stops, and the slide assembly pushes the rotating lug of the bolt to the right. This rotation of the bolt causes the locking lugs to disalign with the locking recesses.

4 Firing: The firing pin then strikes the primer of the cartridge. 5 Unlocking: Expanding gases from the ignited propellant are

vented off through the gas port in the gas regulator. The pressure of the expanding gases is directed rearward through the gas cylinder and forces the piston assembly, slide assembly, and bolt to the rear.

6 Extracting: The bolt moves rearward and the cartridge case is pulled from the chamber.

7 Ejecting: The ejector strikes the upper left of the base of the cartridge, just as the bolt face clears the rear of the ejection port, causing the cartridge case to pivot over the extraction claw and to be thrown clear of the receiver.

8 Cocking: As the bolt continues its movement to the rear, the piston assembly compresses the driving spring. Cocking is completed when the spring is fully compressed.

Page 103: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-10 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1

Ammunition

Four Types The M249 SAW fires various types of 5.56mm ammunition. The recommended combat mix of SAW ammunition is four M855 ball ammunition rounds to one M856 tracer round. Unlike the standard 5.56mm ammunition you use with the M16A2 service rifle, some of these rounds are color coded. The table below shows the four standard types of M249 SAW ammunition and the color and purpose of each type.

Type Color Used For M855 (Ball)

Anti-personnel and light materials

M856 (Tracer)

Signaling, incendiary effects, and anti-personnel

M232 (Dummy)

Mechanical training, dry-fire exercises, and function checks

M200 (Blank)

Training evolutions

Page 104: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-11 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

15 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 12 by performing the action required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 A capability of the M249 squad automatic weapon is to provide long-range,

close defensive, and final protective fires as part of the squad’s defensive lines and to a. provide special capabilities. b. provide close and continuous fire in support of front-line rifle squads. c. support additional power for adverse conditions. d. provide support but only during emergency situations.

Item 2 What is the maximum effective range in meters of the M249 SAW against an

area target? a. 600 b. 800 c. 1,000 d. 1,100

Continued on next page

Page 105: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-12 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Items 3 Through 7

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the step in the cycle of operation for the M249 SAW from column 2 in the correct sequence in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 Correct Sequence

Column 2 Steps in Cycle of Operation

___ 3. ___ 4. ___ 5. ___ 6. ___ 7.

a. Chambering/Locking b. Ejecting/Cocking c. Feeding d. Firing e. Unlocking/Extracting

Item 8 The recommended combat mix of M249 SAW ammunition is four

a. M196 tracer rounds to one M193 ball round. b. M200 blank rounds to one M855 ball round. c. M855 ball rounds to one M856 tracer round. d. M856 tracer rounds to one M199 dummy round.

Items 9 Through 12

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the type of M249 ammunition from column 2 that best matches the color or use in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used more than once.

Column 1 Color or Use

Column 2 Type of Ammunition

___ 9. Orange ___ 10. Function check ___ 11. Antipersonnel or light

material. ___ 12. Training evolutions.

a. M199 Dummy b. M855 Ball c. M200 Blank d. M856 Tracer

Page 106: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-13 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise Solutions

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 b 3-4 2 c 3-6 3 c 3-9 4 a 3-9 5 d 3-9 6 e 3-9 7 b 3-9 8 c 3-10 9 d 3-10 10 a 3-10 11 b 3-10 12 c 3-10

Page 107: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-14 Study Unit 3, Lesson 1 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank)

Page 108: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-15 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

LESSON 2

CLEARING, DISASSEMBLING, AND CLEANING

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

30 minutes

Lesson Scope The objective of this lesson is to teach you how to clear, disassemble, and

clean the M249 squad automatic weapon (SAW).

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the steps to clear the M249 SAW. �� Identify the components of the M249 SAW and their functions. �� Identify the steps to disassemble the M249 SAW. �� Identify the cleaners/lubricants by use for the M249 SAW. �� Identify precautions for the care of the M249 SAW in extreme

environments.

Continued on next page

Page 109: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-16 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 3-15 Clearing 3-17 Components 3-19 Disassembling 3-21 Cleaning and Care 3-29 Lesson 2 Exercise 3-34

Page 110: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-17 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Clearing

Steps Before you begin to disassemble any weapon, you must first check to ensure

there is no ammunition present. The below table lists the steps to clear the M249 SAW.

Step Action 1 Pull the cocking handle to the rear with the right hand and lock

the bolt to the rear. Push the cocking handle forward until it clicks.

2 Push the safety from left to right. Red should not be visible on the safety.

Continued on next page

Page 111: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-18 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Clearing, Continued

Steps, continued

Step Action 3 Remove the ammunition by raising the cover assembly or

depressing the magazine release tab to remove the M16 magazine from the cover assembly

OR

4 Raise the feed tray. Inspect the chamber and receiver to ensure that all ammunition and links have been removed.

5 Close the cover assembly and lock it. 6 Push the safety from right to left (red now visible). 7 Move cocking handle to the rear, squeeze the trigger, and ride

the bolt home. Note: Never allow the bolt to slam home on an empty

chamber. Doing so will damage the weapon.

Page 112: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-19 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Components

Major Parts After you clear the M249 SAW, you are ready to disassemble it. The M249

SAW can be disassembled into its major components, shown on the figure below. Each component is described in the table on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 113: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-20 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Components, Continued

Major Parts, continued

The table below lists the M249 SAW components and their uses. The references are to the picture on the previous page.

Picture

Reference Component Function

A Barrel Housing the cartridge for firing and supporting the front sights

B Rear sight Adjusting impact of the round for both windage and elevation

C Cover, feed mechanism, and feed tray pawl

Feeding the link belt ammunition into the weapon and holding cartridges in position for striking, feeding, and chambering

D Cocking handle Pulling the moving parts to the rear E Buttstock, shoulder,

and folding shoulder rest

Serving as a shoulder support for aiming and firing the weapon

F Piston Transferring power from propelling gases to the bolt slide assembly to operate the weapon

G Bolt Feeding, stripping, chambering, firing, and extracting using propellant gases

H Slide Housing the firing pin and roller assembly

I Operating rod Absorbing recoil from the bolt and operating rod assembly at the end of recoil movement

J Receiver Supporting all major components and controlling the functioning of the weapon

K Trigger mechanism Controlling the firing of the weapon L Handguard Providing thermal insulation to protect

the operator's hands from heat and housing the cleaning equipment

M Bipod Supporting the weapon in a prone and sitting position

N Gas cylinder Locking the bipod in place on the receiver and providing a passageway for operating gases

Page 114: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-21 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Disassembling

Procedures Now that you are familiar with the components of the M249 SAW, you can

start to disassemble the weapon into its main groups: �� Operating rod assembly �� Slide assembly and bolt �� Heat shield �� Barrel assembly �� Gas regulator �� Handguard �� Gas cylinder �� Buttstock and shoulder assembly �� Trigger mechanism Note: Before disassembly begins, ensure the bipod legs are locked open.

Operating Rod Assembly

The following table lists the steps to remove the operating rod assembly of the M249 SAW.

WARNING: Be sure the bolt is in the forward position before disassembly

of the M249 SAW. The guild rod can cause death or injury if the guide spring is retracted with bolt pulled to rear.

Continued on next page

Page 115: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-22 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Removing the Operating Rod Assembly

Be sure you have read the warning on the previous page. Look at the first step listed in the table below.

Step Action

1 Pull the upper retaining pin at the rear of the receiver to the left and allow the buffer and buttstock assembly to pivot downward.

2 Remove the operating rod assembly from the receiver by pressing inward and up on the rear of the operating rod with one thumb. Slowly let the drive spring expand and remove it from the receiver. Separate the drive spring and operating rod.

Continued on next page

Page 116: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-23 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Slide Assembly and Bolt

The table below lists the steps to remove the slide assembly and bolt.

Step Action

1 Pull the cocking handle to the rear. Slide the moving parts out and set them aside.

2 Separate the bolt from the slide assembly by rotating the bolt counterclockwise to disengage the lug. Pull the bolt forward off the slide assembly.

Note: When you remove the bolt, the firing pin spring is free. Be

sure you don’t lose it.

Continued on next page

Page 117: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-24 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Slide Assembly and Bolt, continued

Step Action

3 Separate the slide assembly from the piston using the spring guide to press the retaining pin at the rear of the piston to the left. Lift the slide assembly upward.

Heat Shield Hold the weapon firmly, grasp the heat shield just forward of the barrel

handle, and lift the heat shield off the barrel.

Continued on next page

Page 118: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-25 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Barrel Assembly

The table below lists the steps to remove the barrel assembly of the M249 SAW.

Step Action

1 Close the cover. 2 Depress the locking lever of the barrel using your left hand. 3 Hold the carrying handle with your right hand, lift the barrel up,

and push the barrel forward as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 119: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-26 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Gas Regulator The table below lists the steps to remove the gas regulator of the M249 SAW.

Step Action 1 Rotate the gas collar pin out of the notch by placing the tip of the

scraper with the concave side inside the notch.

2 Rotate the collar counterclockwise over the concave portion of the tip on the scraper and past the notch until the collar slides off.

3 Remove the gas regulator by pulling to separate it from the gas block.

Continued on next page

Page 120: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-27 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Removing the Handguard

The table below lists the steps to remove the handguard from the M249 SAW.

Step Action

1 Push the retaining pin on the handguard from right to the left using the cleaning rod section and pull the handguard down and away to separate it from the receiver.

Gas Cylinder To remove the bipod and gas cylinder, turn the gas cylinder to the left or right

until you hear a click. Pull the gas cylinder forward and separate it from the bipod.

Continued on next page

Page 121: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-28 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Removing the Buttstock and Shoulder Assembly

Press the lower retaining pin to the left and separate the buffer and buttstock assembly from the receiver.

Removing the Trigger Mechanism

With the lower retaining pin still to the left, pull downward and to the rear on the handgrip to remove the rigger mechanism assembly from the receiver.

Page 122: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-29 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Care and Cleaning

Action Proper care of the M249 SAW consists of three actions.

�� Cleaning �� Inspecting �� Lubricating

When to Clean You need to conduct care and cleaning on a regular basis.

�� After firing �� At least daily under combat/field conditions �� Weekly when the gun is in storage

Cleaning and Lubricating Materials

The only authorized cleaner and lubricating materials on the M249 SAW is CLP. No other cleaners or abrasives are authorized.

Cleaning Kit The M249 SAW is designed to hold a cleaning kit in the handguard. The

kit includes the following tools: �� Scraper Tool �� Cleaning Rod Handle �� Rod Section (2) �� Chamber Brush �� Bore Brush �� Swab Holder

Continued on next page

Page 123: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-30 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Care and Cleaning, Continued

Cleaning M249 SAW’s Barrels

The M249 SAW's barrels are cleaned in the same way as the M12A2 service rifle. The table below list the procedures to clean, inspect, and lubricate.

Step Action

1 Clean the bore and chamber using CPL and fresh swabs. 2 Wipe all metal components and surfaces that have been

exposed to powder fouling. 3 Inspect by looking for cracks, dents, burrs, or other damage. 4 Lubricate by applying a light coat of lubricant to all parts.

Generously lubricate the moving parts to reduce friction during operation. Note: Do not lubricate the top or face of the bolt.

Cleaning M249 SAW’s Receiver Group

Clean the receiver and cover assembly using a general purpose bush and M60E3 machine gun receiver brush. The table below list the procedures to clean, inspect, and lubricate.

Step Action

1 Wipe all metal components and surfaces. 2 Look for cracks, dents, burrs, or other damage. 3 The windage and elevation knobs on the rear sight should be

movable and legible. Ensure scale screws are not worn or burred.

4 Check springs and moving parts for weak or binding action. 5 Lubricate by applying a moderate coat of CLP on the slide

rails and moving parts. 6 Place a light coat of CLP on rear sight and exercise the

windage and elevation knobs.

Continued on next page

Page 124: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-31 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Care and Cleaning, Continued

Cleaning the M249 SAW’s Gas System

The gas system includes the regulator, cylinder, gas block, and piston. The table below lists the procedures to clean and inspect the gas system. Wipe the parts dry; do not use any type of oil to lubricate the system.

Step Action

1 Remove all carbon from the gas regulator by using the scraper tool as shown below. Remove carbon from the following locations: The gas vent holes

The central hole

The groves of the body

Continued on next page

Page 125: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-32 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Care and Cleaning, Continued

Cleaning the M249 SAW’s Gas System, continued

Step Action

2 Clean the front interior of the gas cylinder by inserting and turning the flat side of the scraper in a circular motion as shown in the picture below.

3 Use the scraper tool as shown below to clean the grooves and front hole cleans the piston.

Continued on next page

Page 126: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-33 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2

Care and Cleaning, Continued

Inspection and Lubrication

To inspect and lubricate the M249 SAW, do the following:

Step Action

1 Look for cracks, dents, burrs, or other damage. 2 Wipe dry with clean cloth. Do not apply oil to gas system.

Extreme Environments

In extreme environments, you must take extra precautions to be sure your M249 SAW operates trouble-free. The following table shows the precautions you must take for each environmental condition.

Environment Precautions

Damp or salty air �� Inspect the weapon frequently for rust. �� Keep the weapon as moisture-free as possible. �� Field-strip, clean, and lubricate the weapon

more often. �� Use a generous coat of lubricant.

Hot, dry, and sandy �� Clean and lubricate more often. �� Wipe the weapon dry. Do not use extra

lubricant because the grit and dust will stick to the parts.

�� Cover the weapon when not in use. Cold, snowy, and icy �� Cover the weapon when outside.

�� Keep the weapon away from direct heat when inside.

�� If the metal sweats, dry and lubricate the parts. Lubricate enough so that it can be spread with finger.

Page 127: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-34 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

15 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 13 by performing the action. Check your answers

against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 To clear the M249 SAW, charge the weapon by pulling the cocking handle to

the rear, pushing the charging handle forward until it clicks, and a. locking the bolt to the rear. b. being sure the charging handle “clicks.” c. being sure the red ring is visible. d. pushing the safety to the right.

Items 2 Through 5

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the function in column 2 that best matches the component of the M249 SAW in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 Component of M249 SAW

Column 2 Function

___ 2. Piston ___ 3. Gas cylinder ___ 4. Bolt ___ 5. Slide

a. Feeding, stripping, chambering, firing, and extracting using propellant gases

b. Housing firing pin and roller assembly

c. Transferring power from propelling gases to the bolt slide assembly

d. Locking the bipod in place on the receiver and providing a passageway for operating gases

Continued on next page

Page 128: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-35 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 6 Disassembling the M249 SAW consists of removing _____ main groups.

a. 7 b. 8 c. 11 d. 14

Items 7 Through 10

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the steps to dissemble the M249 SAW in column 2 in the correct sequence in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 Correct Sequence

Column 2 Steps

___ 7. ___ 8. ___ 9. ___ 10.

a. Heat shield b. Barrel assembly c. Slide and bolt assembly d. Operating rod assembly

Item 11 Which cleaner/lubricant is the only authorized lubricating for the M249

SAW? a. CLP b. RBC c. LSA a. LAW

Continued on next page

Page 129: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-36 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 12 The procedures for proper care of the M249 SAW are

a. cleaning, inspecting, and lubricating. b. cleaning and lubricating. c. cleaning and inspecting. d. disassembling, cleaning, and lubricating.

Item 13 Which precautionary measures must you take for the M249 SAW in a damp

or salty environment? a. Inspect frequently for rust; field-strip, clean and lubricate more often; and

use generous coat of lubricant. b. Clean and lubricate more often; wipe weapon dry; and cover weapon

when not in use. c. Cover weapon when outside; dry and lubricate parts before taking outside;

and wipe the weapon dry. d. Cover weapon and generously lubricate before taking outside.

Page 130: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-37 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise Solutions

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer` Reference Page 1 d 3-17 2 c 3-20 3 d 3-20 4 a 3-20 5 b 3-20 6 b 3-21 7 d 3-22 8 c 3-23 9 a 3-24 10 b 3-25 11 a 3-29 12 a 3-29 13 a 3-33

Page 131: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-38 Study Unit 3, Lesson 2 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 132: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-39 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3

LESSON 3

ASSEMBLING, PERFORMING THE FUNCTION CHECK, AND MOUNTING

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson teaches you how to assemble, perform a function check, and

mount the M249 squad automatic weapon (SAW).

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the steps to assemble the M249 SAW. �� Identify the steps to perform a function check on the M249 squad SAW. �� Identify the steps to engage the M249 SAW bipod.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 3-39 Assembling 3-40 Performing a Function Check 3-47 Engaging the Bipod 3-48 Lesson 3 Exercise 3-49

Page 133: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-40 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3

Assembling

Introduction After you have cleaned your M249 SAW, you are ready to assemble your

weapon. To assemble the M249 SAW, replace the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.

Bipod and Gas Cylinder

The table below lists the steps to assemble the bipod and gas cylinder on the M249 SAW.

Step Action 1 Place the bipod on the receiver as shown in the picture below.

2 Push the gas cylinder through the bipod yoke into the receiver. 3 Push the cylinder to the rear and guide the end of the cylinder into

the receiver with your other hand as shown in the picture below.

4 Turn the cylinder until the spring clicks into the recess at the rear of the gas cylinder.

Continued on next page

Page 134: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-41 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Handguard The table below lists the steps to assemble the handguard on the M249 SAW.

Step Action 1 Replace all cleaning equipment, if removed, in stowage areas. 2 Place the handguard on the receiver and slide it backwards until it

stops as shown in the picture below.

3 Push the handguard retaining pin to the right using the guide rod. 4 Pull the handguard downward to check to see if it is properly

secured as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 135: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-42 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Gas Regulator The table below lists the steps to attach the gas regulator to the M249 SAW.

Step Action 1 Hold the barrel in one hand with the muzzle up. 2 Insert the gas regulator into the lower end of the gas block hole. 3 Align the notch in the regulator body with the notch in the gas

block. 4 Support the installed regulator body on a firm surface. 5 Place the gas collar regulator on the protruding end of the body

and align the spring with the stud. 6 Firmly push downward and rotate the collar clockwise into the

normal position as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 136: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-43 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Barrel Assembly

The table below lists the steps to attach the barrel assembly to the M249 SAW.

Step Action

1 Depress the locking lever with your left hand as shown in the picture below.

2 Hold the carrying handle with your right hand. 3 Pull the barrel rearward. 4 Push downward as shown in the picture below.

5 Lock the barrel into place by releasing the locking lever. 6 Install the heat shield.

Continued on next page

Page 137: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-44 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Trigger Mechanism

The table below lists the steps to attach the trigger mechanism to the M249 SAW.

Step Action 1 Push the trigger mechanism upward to the receiver as shown in the

picture below.

2 Push the retaining pins to the left.

Buttstock and Shoulder Assembly

The table below lists the steps to attach the buttstock and shoulder assembly to the M249 SAW.

Step Action 1 Align the lower hole in the buttstock and shoulder assembly with

the rear hole in the trigger mechanism. 2 Push the lower pin to the right as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 138: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-45 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Bolt and Slide Assembly

The table below lists the steps to attach the bolt and slide assembly to the M249 SAW.

Step Action

1 Place the bolt carrier (slide) on the piston as shown in the picture below.

2 Push the retaining pin from the left to the right to secure it. Note: Before you continue, be sure the firing pin spring is on

the firing pin. 3 Place the bolt in the bolt carrier. Press the firing pin spring to

compress it. 4 Rotate the bolt and hook its driving lug into the bolt carrier. 5 Place the moving parts into the receiver with the feed cover open

by placing the bolt lugs in the rails. 6 Place the piston in the rear of the gas cylinder, simultaneously

pressing the trigger with the forefinger as shown in the picture below.

Note: Step 6 ensures that the sear does not prevent the moving parts from going forward.

Continued on next page

Page 139: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-46 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Operating Rod Assembly

The table below lists the steps to attach the operating rod assembly to the M249 SAW.

Step Action

1 Hold the pistol grip with one hand and push the operating assembly into its housing in the rear with your other hand.

2 Press in and down on the rear of the operating rod assembly until its two lugs are positioned in the receiver grooves as shown in the picture below.

3 Pivot the butt upward into position as shown in the picture below.

4 Push the retaining pin to the right and close the cover assembly.

Page 140: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-47 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check

Purpose To ensure proper reassembly, the operator must perform a function check of

the weapon.

Procedure The table below lists the steps to perform a function check on the M249

SAW.

Step Action 1 Grasp the cocking handle with the right hand, palm up, and pull

the bolt to the rear, locking it in place. 2 Push the cocking handle forward and lock it in place. 3 Place the safety switch to SAFE and depress the trigger. Nothing

should happen. 4 Grasp the cocking handle and pull and hold it to the rear. 5 Place the safety switch to FIRE and depress the trigger. 6 Ease the bolt forward to prevent it from slamming into the

chamber.

Page 141: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-48 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3

Engaging the Bipod

Procedures You can fire the M249 SAW in the prone position using the bipod group.

The table below lists the steps to engage the bipod to support the machine gunner while firing.

Step Action

1 Lower the bipod legs by holding the legs together and pulling them down and away from the handguard.

2 Release the legs so that they lock in the vertical position. 3 Extend the bipod legs by grasping the foot of each leg and pulling

down.

Page 142: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-49 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete items 1through 3 by performing the action required and choose the

best answer. Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Attaching the _______________ is the last procedure in the sequence for

assembling the M249 SAW. a. bipod and gas cylinder assembly b. trigger mechanism assembly c. operating rod assembly d. buttstock and shoulder assembly

Item 2 Which of the following is the first step in conducting a function check on the

M249 SAW? a. Place the fire/safe switch on S and depress the trigger b. Grasp the cocking handle with the right hand, palm up, and pull the bolt to

the rear locking it in place c. Open the cover d. Place the fire/safe switch on F and depress the trigger

Item 3 What is the first step to engage the M249 SAW’s bipod?

a. Lower bipod assembly legs b. Push in the locking pin c. Engage the front axis of the weapon d. Attach the 200-round box of ammunition

Page 143: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-50 Study Unit 3, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise Solutions

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 c 3-46 2 b 3-47 3 a 3-48

Page 144: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-51 Study Unit 3, Lesson 4

LESSON 4

USING THE SAW

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson covers the techniques for sighting, firing, and performing

immediate action on the M249 squad automatic weapon (SAW).

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the components of the rear sight assembly for the M249 SAW. �� Identify the procedures for firing the M249 SAW. �� Identify the steps to perform immediate action for the M249 SAW.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 3-51 Sighting 3-52 Firing 3-54 Malfunctions, Stoppages, and Immediate Action 3-59 Lesson 4 Exercise 3-61

Page 145: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-52 Study Unit 3, Lesson 4

Sighting

Sight Assembly The M249 SAW has two sights that are used to aim the machinegun.

�� The front sight on the M249 SAW is located on the barrel assembly. It is

a semifixed, hooded post-type sight.

�� The rear sight is a peep-type sight that is fully adjustable for windage and

elevation correction, as shown below.

Continued on next page

Page 146: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-53 Study Unit 3, Lesson 4

Sighting, Continued

Parts and Function

The table below lists the parts and function of the rear sight assembly.

Part Function

Windage Knob To make adjustments for the effects of wind, traverse the rear sight across the sliding scale. �� The sliding scale is marked with index lines that are

equal to .5 mils. �� Each line on the sliding scale is equal and moves the

strike of the round almost 2 (1.97”) inches at 100 meters.

Elevation Knob To make adjustments for range, move the rear sight to the range settings that are marked from 300 to 1,000 meters. �� Even numbers are marked on the left side of the scale

and are numbered 4, 6, 8, 10. �� Odd numbers are on the right side and are marked

with the number 3 and three index lines, representing 300, 500, 700, 900 meters.

Notes: For fine adjustments in range, you can move the

peep sight nine 180-degree turns between range lines. Doing so moves the strike of the rounds almost 2 (1.97”) inches at 100 meters.

The table below shows at various distances what

one click moves the strike of the round.

One click moves the strike… Distance from target in meters In centimeters In inches 100 5 2 200 10 4 300 15 6 400 20 8 500 25 10 600 30 12 700 35 14 800 40 16 900 45 18

Page 147: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-54 Study Unit 3, Lesson 4

Firing

Introduction Firing the M249 SAW actually consists of three procedures:

�� Loading (200-round box or 30-round magazine) �� Firing �� Zeroing

Loading the 200-Round Ammunition Box

To engage targets with the M249 SAW, you must first load ammunition into the weapon. The table below lists the procedure to load the 200-round ammunition box into the M249 SAW.

Step Action 1 Charge the weapon. 2 Open the cover assembly by squeezing the cover latches. 3 Raise the feed tray and look into the chamber to be sure that there

is no round chambered. 4 Lower the feed tray. 5 Align the box latch with the receiver dovetail and attach the 200-

round ammunition box to the underside of the receiver. 6 Place the link belt in the feed tray; making certain the open side of

the links is down with the first round against the cartridge stop as shown in the picture below.

7 Hold the belt in position and close the cover assembly.

Continued on next page

Page 148: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-55 Study Unit 3, Lesson 4

Firing, Continued

Emergency Situations

During emergency situations, a 30-round magazine may be loaded into the M249 SAW.

Loading the 30-Round Magazine

The table below lists the steps to load the 30-round magazine into the M249 SAW.

Step Action

1 Insert the magazine into the magazine well on the left side of the receiver as shown in the picture below.

2 Push the magazine firmly to the right until it bottoms in the well and the magazine release tab “clicks” into the recess in the magazine. Note: You cannot insert the magazine while a 200-round

ammunition box is attached to the weapon.

Continued on next page

Page 149: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-56 Study Unit 3, Lesson 4

Firing, Continued

Using the Bipod in the Prone Position

If the automatic rifleman aims his weapon correctly and properly applies a steady hold he can become a formidable weapon on the battlefield. The table below lists the steps to fire the M249 SAW with the bipod in the prone position.

Step Action

1 Assume a prone position to the rear of the weapon with the shoulder rest on your firing shoulder.

2 Spread your legs a comfortable distance apart with heels as close to the ground as possible.

3 Grasp the pistol grip with your firing hand. 4 Place your nonfiring hand on the small of the stock with your little

finger touching the receiver.

5 Place your cheek against the forefinger of your nonfiring hand and apply a firm, steady pressure rearward and down.

Continued on next page

Page 150: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-57 Study Unit 3, Lesson 4

Firing, Continued

Aiming the M249 SAW

To aim the M249 SAW, the automatic rifleman must align the sights, focus his eye, and obtain a correct sight picture for rounds to hit target. The fundamentals to be successful on the battlefield are listed below.

Sight Alignment

Align the hooded front sight post horizontally and vertically in the center of the rear sight aperture (peep sight).

Sight Picture While applying sight alignment, place the front sight post on the center base

of the target.

Continued on next page

Page 151: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-58 Study Unit 3, Lesson 4

Firing, Continued

Field Zeroing To successfully engage targets, the automatic rifleman must zero the M249

SAW. The table below lists the steps to field zero the M249 SAW.

Step Action 1 Center the rear sight by

�� Rotating the windage knob until the peep sight is completely to

the right. �� Rotating the windage knob backwards 12 clicks. Note: To check your sight, start with the sight all the way to the

right. Rotate the windage knob backwards until it stops the left side. Count the clicks and divide this number by two.

2 Rotate the elevation knob to the desired range. Note: A 300-meter range is recommended because of the ease

to determine adjustments for the center of the beaten zone.

3 Fire a three- to five-round burst on the center of your target. 4 To make windage changes, moving the windage knob

�� Forward (right) to move the impact to the right. �� Backward (left) to move the impact to the left.

5 Change elevation by rotating the peep sight �� Clockwise to lower the impact. �� Counterclockwise to raise the impact.

Page 152: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-59 Study Unit 3, Lesson 4

Malfunctions, Stoppages, and Immediate Action

Malfunctions A malfunction occurs when the M249 SAW does not operate within the

normal cycle of operation.

Stoppages A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of operation caused by faulty

action of the M249 SAW or by faulty ammunition.

Common Types The table below lists the most common type of stoppages, their causes, and

the corrective action for each.

Type Causes Corrective Action Insufficient lubrication Lubricate as required. Insufficient gas pressure Clean gas regulator, piston, and

cylinder. Defective ammunition links

Replace the ammunition.

Obstruction in receiver Remove the obstruction.

Failure to feed

Unlatched cover Latch the cover. Defective ammunition Replace with new ammunition. Failure to fire

Defective parts in the firing mechanism

Inspect the parts and replace worn, burred, or broken parts.

Failure to chamber

Carbon buildup in gas cylinder or receiver

Clean gas cylinder and receiver.

Stuck cartridge case Remove cartridge case.

Dirty chamber/bolt and slide assembly

Clean chamber, bolt, and slide assembly.

Failure to extract

Damaged extractor spring

Notify unit maintenance.

Failure to eject Short recoil Clean and lubricate bolt and slide assembly.

Continued on next page

Page 153: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-60 Study Unit 3, Lesson 4

Malfunctions, Stoppages, and Immediate Action, Continued

Immediate Action

Immediate action is the action you take to clear a stoppage without investigating the cause. The table below lists the steps to apply immediate action for the M249 SAW.

Step Action

1 Keep the weapon pointed down range and wait 5 seconds. 2 Charge the M249 SAW; observing for an ejected round. If the

round is: �� Ejected, attempt to fire. �� Not ejected and the barrel is

�� Hot (200 rounds fired within two minutes). Wait 15 minutes and clear the weapon.

�� Cold. Clear the weapon and troubleshoot the cause of the malfunction.

Page 154: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-61 Study Unit 3, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 3 by performing the action required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 The rear sight assembly on the M249 SAW is described as a

a. semifixed, hooded post-type sight. b. ladder-type sight. c. adjustable leaf type sight. d. fully adjustable peep-type sight.

Item 2 When placing the link belt in the feed tray of the M249 SAW, how should

you position the rounds? a. The open side of the links should be down. b. The open side of the links should be up. c. The second open round should be placed on the cartridge stop. d. The third open round should be placed on the cartridge stop.

Item 3 During the second step in immediate action to the M249 SAW, the gunner

observes for a. cause of stoppage. b. ejecting of links. c. ejecting of a round. d. nothing.

Page 155: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 3-62 Study Unit 3, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise Solutions

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 d 3-52 2 a 3-54 3 c 3-60

Page 156: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-1 Study Unit 4

STUDY UNIT 4

M240G MACHINEGUN

Overview

Estimated Study Time

2 hours, 20 minutes

Unit Scope This study unit teaches you the characteristics, operation, maintenance,

immediate action, care and cleaning techniques, and firing procedures for the M240G machinegun (M240G).

Learning Objectives

After completing this unit, you should be able to �� Identify the characteristics and capabilities of the M240G. �� Identify how to maintain the M240G. �� Identify the steps to employing the M240G. �� Identify how to troubleshoot malfunctions and stoppages for the M240G.

In This Study Unit

This study unit contains the following lessons:

Topic See Page

Lesson 1 Description 4-3 Lesson 2 Clearing and Field Stripping 4-19 Lesson 3 Cleaning, Assembling, and Inspecting 4-33 Lesson 4 Using the M240G Machinegun 4-51

Page 157: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-2 Study Unit 4

(This page left intentionally blank.)

Page 158: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-3 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

LESSON 1

DESCRIPTION

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

30 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson is to teach you the basic characteristics of the M240G

machinegun (M240G), the M122 tripod, and the authorized ammunition.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the role of the M240G. �� Describe the principal characteristics of the M240G. �� Identify the steps in the cycle of operation of the M240G. �� Identify the types of M240G ammunition by description and use. �� Identify the M122 tripod with accessories for the M240G.

In This Lesson The lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 4-3 Role 4-4 General Characteristics and Capabilities 4-5 Cycle of Operation 4-7 Ammunition 4-9 Mounts and Accessories 4-10 Lesson 1 Exercise 4-16

Page 159: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-4 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

Role of the M240G Machinegun

Role The M240G supports the infantryman in both the offense and the defense by

providing a heavy volume of accurate, long-range fire beyond the capability of individual small arms.

Major Components of the M240G

This diagram and table identify the major components of the M240G.

Number Name of Component

1 Barrel group assembly 2 Buttstock and buffer assembly 3 Drive spring rod assembly 4 Bolt and operating rod assembly 5 Trigger housing assembly 6 Cover assembly 7 Feed tray 8 Receiver assembly

Page 160: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-5 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

General Characteristics and Capabilities

Weight The following table lists the weight (in pounds) of the M240G.

Item Weight (in pounds) Weight of machinegun 25.6 Weight of tripod, M122 flex mount, and T&E (complete)

20

Weight of spare barrel case (SL-3 complete)

12.9

Dimensions The following table lists the dimensions (in inches) of the M240G.

Item Dimension (in inches) Overall length of the gun 49

Rifling 4 grooves with uniform right-hand twist (1 turn per 12 inches)

Height of machinegun on M122 tripod

17

Manipulation Limits of M122 Tripod

The following table lists the traverse limits for the M240G (with M122 tripod with traversing and elevation (T&E) mechanism).

Item Limits

Elevation 247 mils (18 degrees) Depression 200 mils (11 degrees) Traverse (traversing bar) 875 mils (49 degrees)

Rates of Fire The following table lists the rates of fire for the M240G.

Method of Delivery Rates of fire (in rounds per minute)

Cyclic 650-950 (depends on gas setting) on continuous burst

Sustained 100; 6-8 round burst (4-5 seconds between bursts)

Rapid 200; 10-12 round burst (2-3 seconds between bursts)

Continued on next page

Page 161: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-6 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

General Characteristics and Capabilities, Continued

Range The following table lists the range limits (in meters) for the M240G.

Range Limits (in meters) Maximum 3,725 Maximum effective (area) 1,800 Maximum effective (point) 800 Tracer burnout Approximately 900 Grazing fire 600

Three Descriptive Characteristics

Three descriptive characteristics of the M240G are that it is �� Belt-fed. The gun is fed by a disintegrating metallic link belt. �� Gas-operated. The gas produced from firing one round provides the

energy to mechanically prepare the weapon to fire the next. �� Air-cooled. The barrel and receiver are exposed to permit cooling by the

air.

Page 162: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-7 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

Cycle of Operation

Eight Steps The cycle of operation for the M240G consists of eight sequential steps listed

in the table below.

Step Action Firing After the bolt reaches its locked position, the operating rod

moves forward, independent of the bolt. It carries the striker of the fixed firing pin through the aperture in the face of the bolt, striking and detonating the primer of the cartridge.

Unlocking After the cartridge ignites and the projectile passes the gas port, part of the gases enter the gas cylinder. The rapidly expanding gases enter the hollow end cap of the gas piston and force the operating assembly to the rear, providing the power for the last four steps in the cycle of functioning. The operating rod now moves rearward, independent of the bolt, for a short distance. At this point, the locking lever begins to swing toward the rear, carrying the bolt with it into its unlocked position, and clears the barrel socket.

Extracting The extractor grips the rim of the cartridge as the bolt and operating rod pull the case from the chamber.

Ejecting As the case is withdrawn from the chamber, the ejector exerts a push from the top, and the extractor exerts a pull from the bottom. The casing falls from the gun as soon as it reaches the cartridge ejection port. At approximately the same time, the empty link is forced out of the link ejection port between the cartridge stops on the feed tray by the next round moving into the feed tray groove.

Continued on next page

Page 163: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-8 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

Cycle of Operation, Continued

Eight Steps, continued

Step Action Cocking

This is the process of placing the parts of the gun in position to fire the next round. During the rearward independent movement of the operating rod, the firing pin striker is withdrawn from the face of the bolt. When the bolt has moved far enough to the rear to pick up the next round for chambering, cocking is completed.

Feeding

When the bolt is to the rear, the outer feed pawls are outside the first round of ammunition. The inner feed pawls are between the first and second rounds. As the bolt moves forward to fire the round in the feed tray groove, the belt feed pawl moves to the left. It moves up and over the second round in the belt of ammunition and is now in position to drag the second round into the feed tray groove. As the bolt moves to the rear after firing, the belt feed pawl moves to the right, dragging the second round into the feed tray groove. Inside the cover the cam roller, the feed arm with control spring, the feed arm fork, and the pivot arm are present only so the feed pawls can move back and forth, dragging rounds into position to be chambered.

Chambering

This is the process of stripping a round from the belt and seating it in the chamber. As the bolt travels forward, the upper locking lug of the bolt contacts the base of the cartridge. The bolt strips the round from the belt link. The chambering ramp angles downward and forces the round toward the chamber along with the spring tension of the cartridge guide pawl. The cartridge guide pawl also holds back the belt link. When the round is fully seated in the chamber, the extractor snaps over the extractor rim of the cartridge, and the ejector is depressed.

Locking

During chambering, the bolt enters the barrel socket as the operating rod is driven forward by the drive spring and the locking lever, which the bolt is riding on, swings forward pushing the bolt forward and locking it to the barrel socket. Although the term locking is used here, it should be noted that in the M240G the bolt and barrel do not physically interlock. This is why the barrel can be removed even when the bolt is forward.

Page 164: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-9 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

Ammunition

Types Ammunition is issued in a disintegrating metallic split linked belt. The

members of machinegun teams must be able to recognize the types of ammunition and their use. The table below list the ammunition for the M240G:

Type and Illustration Color of Tip Used for

Ball (M80) Plain (No color) �� Marksmanship training

�� Anti-personnel �� Light material

targets Tracer (M62) Orange

�� Observing fire �� Incendiary effect �� Signaling �� Marking targets

Armor-Piercing (M61) Black Lightly armored targets

Blank (M82) No bullet (metal case with no projectile)

Simulated firing

Dummy (M63) No color; fluted cartridge case

�� Gun drills �� Training

(completely inert)

Page 165: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-10 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

Mount and Accessories

Bipod The bipod mount is part of the receiver group. The bipod yoke fits around the

receiver. The forward grip assembly holds the bipod yoke in position. To lower the bipod legs, push in on the leg support lock and rotate the legs down and forward as shown in the diagram below. Note: The legs will automatically lock in the down position.

M122 Tripod The M122 tripod mount consists of the tripod assembly as shown in the

diagram below. The M122 provides a stable firing base for the M240G.

Continued on next page

Page 166: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-11 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

Mount and Accessories, Continued

Traversing Bar The diagram below shows how the traversing bar connects the two rear legs

and supports the traversing and elevation (T&E) mechanism. The traversing bar has a mil scale engraved on it to help the gunner adjust the gun. Engraved on the bar is a scale that measures direction in mils. It is graduated in 5-mil increments and is numbered every 100 mils.

Traversing and Elevating (T&E) Mechanism

The T&E mechanism shown in the diagram below provides controlled manipulation and ability to engage predetermined targets.

Adjusting the T&E

�� Traversing Handwheel: Each click of the handwheel indicates a 1 mil change in direction. The total traverse on the screw is 100 mils.

�� Elevating Handwheel: Each click on the handwheel indicates a 1 mil change in elevation. The total change in elevation is plus or minus 200 mils.

Continued on next page

Page 167: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-12 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

Mount and Accessories, Continued

Flex Mount Assembly

The flex mount joins the gun and T&E to the tripod to enhances the stability and dampens the recoil of the weapon as shown in the diagram below.

Continued on next page

Page 168: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-13 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

Mount and Accessories, Continued

Mounting the M240G

The preferred method is to mount the flex mount assembly first to the tripod and then mount the machine gun. The table below lists the steps to mount the M240G.

Step Action

1 Lock the M122 tripod’s legs open. 2 Center the T&E before mounting. Do the following. On the

�� Elevating handwheel, turn until approximately two fingers are

visible on upper elevating screw. �� Traversing slide, rotate until approximately two fingers are visible

on lower elevating screw. �� Traversing handwheel, turn until the offset head is centered on the

traversing screw.

Continued on next page

Page 169: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-14 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

Mount and Accessories, Continued

Mounting the M240G, continued

Step Action

3 Mount the flex mount assembly on the tripod.

�� Place the pintle assembly of flex mount assembly into the sleeve bushing of the tripod.

�� Engage the pintle locking lever to hold the pintle assembly in place.

4 Mount the T&E mechanism.

�� Lower the traversing slide over the traversing bar. �� Turn the locking lever to secure the traverse slide in place.

Note: See diagram above.

Continued on next page

Page 170: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-15 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1

Mount and Accessories, Continued

Mounting the M240G, continued

Step Action

5 Attach the gun to the flex mount by

�� Aligning the mounting hole �� Inserting the retaining pin, thereby locking the weapon in

place as shown in the diagram below

Page 171: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-16 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

10 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 6 by performing the action required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 The role of the M240G is to provide a

a. medium volume of accurate, long-range fire equal to the capability of

individual small arms. b. heavy volume of accurate, long-range fire beyond the capability of

individual small arms. c. light volume of long-range fire beyond the capability of individual small

arms. d. heavy volume of accurate, short-range fire equal to the capability of

individual small arms.

Item 2 Which of the following is the maximum effective range in meters of the

M240G? a. 11,000 b. 3,725 c. 1,800 d. 600

Item 3 What are the three principal characteristics of the M240G?

a. Magazine-fed, air-cooled, gas-operated b. Belt-fed, air-cooled, gas-operated c. Belt-fed, water-cooled, recoil-operated d. Magazine-fed, air-cooled, blowback-operated

Continued on next page

Page 172: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-17 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 Correctly complete the steps of the cycle of operation of the M240G:

Feeding, chambering, locking, firing, a. extracting, unlocking, ejecting, and cocking. b. unlocking, ejecting, extracting, and cocking. c. extracting, ejecting, unlocking, and cocking. d. unlocking, extracting, ejecting, and cocking.

Item 5 Ammunition with black painted tips is used for what type of targets?

a. Anti personnel b. Lightly armored targets c. Signaling d. Lightly material targets

Item 6 The traversing bar connects to the

a. traversing and elevating mechanism. b. front leg. c. two rear legs. d. bipod yolk.

Page 173: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-18 Study Unit 4, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 b 4-4 2 c 4-6 3 b 4-6 4 d 4-7 5 b 4-9 6 c 4-11

Page 174: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-19 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2

LESSON 2

CLEARING AND FIELD STRIPPING

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

20 minutes

Lesson Scope The purpose of this lesson is to teach you how to clear and fieldstrip the

M240G.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the steps to clear the M240G. �� Identify the steps to fieldstrip the M240G.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics

Topic See Page Introduction 4-19 Clearing 4-20 Field Stripping 4-23 Lesson 2 Exercise 4-30

Page 175: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-20 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2

Clearing

Procedure Before you begin disassembling the M240G, you must clear the weapon to be

sure it is safe. The following table lists the steps to clear the M240G.

Step Action 1 Point the weapon down range or in a safe direction. 2 Attempt to move the safety to the F position as shown in the

picture below.

3 Pull the cocking handle to the rear until the bolt locks as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 176: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-21 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2

Clearing, Continued

Procedure, continued

Step Action

4 Return the cocking handle forward and move the safety to the S position as shown in the pictures below.

5 Push in the latches to open the cover assembly as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 177: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-22 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2

Clearing, Continued

Procedure, continued

Step Action

6 Raise the feed tray and visually inspect the chamber as shown in the picture below.

7 If the chamber is clear �� Place the safety on the fire position (F). �� Pull the cocking handle to the rear (palm up). �� Ease the bolt forward by pulling the trigger. Note: Ease the bolt forward to prevent damage to the bolt and

barrel. 8 Close cover assembly.

Page 178: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-23 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2

Field Stripping

Field Stripping After you have cleared the weapon, you can begin to field strip the

machinegun into its five major groups as follows: �� Barrel �� Trigger housing group �� Buttstock �� Receiver group �� Operating group

Removing the Barrel

The following table lists the steps for removing the barrel.

Step Action

1 Depress and hold the barrel locking latch as shown in the picture below.

2 Simultaneously rotate the barrel carrying handle assembly. 3 Remove the barrel by pulling it straight out as shown in the picture

below.

Continued on next page

Page 179: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-24 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2

Field Stripping, Continued

Removing the Trigger Housing Group

The following table lists the steps to remove the trigger housing group.

Step Action

1 Depress the spring pin as shown in the picture below.

2 Remove the spring pin as shown in the picture below.

3 Pull the trigger housing group back and down as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 180: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-25 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2

Field Stripping, Continued

Removing the Buttstock

The following table lists the steps to remove the buttstock.

Step Action

1 Completely depress the buttstock release latch as shown in the picture below.

2 Lift the buttstock while holding the receiver with your free hand as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 181: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-26 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2

Field Stripping, Continued

Removing Receiver Group

The following table lists the steps to remove the drive spring.

Step Action

1 Push the drive spring up and back as shown in the picture below.

2 Lift the operating rod out of the receiver as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 182: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-27 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2

Field Stripping, Continued

Removing Receiver Group, continued

Step Action 3 Depress the cover latches and raise the cover assembly as shown in

the picture below.

4 Pull the cocking handle to the rear as shown in the picture below.

5 Slide the bolt and operating assembly to the rear and remove them as shown in picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 183: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-28 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2

Field Stripping, Continued

Removing Receiver Group, continued

Step Action 6 Close the cover and push the spring pin out with the back of the

buffer and remove it as shown in the picture below.

7 Depress the cover latch and remove the cover assembly and the feed tray assembly as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 184: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-29 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2

Field Stripping, Continued

Gas System Rotate clockwise and remove the collar and the gas regulator assembly from

the gas plug. Slide the gas plug to the rear as shown in the picture below.

Page 185: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-30 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

10 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 6 by performing the action required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What is the first step in clearing the M240G?

a. Raise the cover by pressing the cover latch. b. Visually inspect the chamber. c. Raise the feedtray. d. Point the gun down range or in a safe direction.

Items 2 Through 6

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the step for field stripping from column 2 in the correct sequence in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 Correct Sequence

Column 2 Steps for Field Stripping

___ 2. ___ 3. ___ 4. ___ 5. ___ 6.

a. Remove the receiver group. b. Remove the barrel. c. Remove the buttstock. d. Remove the trigger housing

group. e. Remove the operating group.

Page 186: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-31 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 d 4-20 2 b 4-23 3 d 4-24 4 c 4-25 5 a 4-25 6 e 4-27

Page 187: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-32 Study Unit 4, Lesson 2 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 188: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-33 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

LESSON 3

CLEANING, ASSEMBLING, AND INSPECTING

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope The purpose of this lesson is to teach you the basics in cleaning, maintaining,

assembling, and inspecting the M240G machinegun (M240G).

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the function and type of cleaning and lubricating material for the

M240G. �� Identify the maintenance procedures for the M240G. �� Identify the steps for assembling the M240G. �� Identify the steps for inspecting the M240G.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 4-33 Cleaning 4-34 Maintaining 4-35 Assembling 4-39 Inspecting 4-44 Spare Barrel Case 4-46 Lesson 3 Exercise 4-47

Page 189: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-34 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Cleaning

Purpose Proper care and cleaning prevents damage to the weapon and ensures its proper

functioning during firing. CAUTION: Unauthorized maintenance can damage a weapon, sometimes

beyond repair.

Cleaning Materials

The table below lists the types of cleaning and lubricating materials that you will need to clean the M240G.

Type Function

Cleaner-lubricant- preservative (CLP)

Preferred lubricant to lubricate operating parts before, during, and after firing. Note: This lubricant is an authorized cleaner.

Rifle bore cleaner (RBC)

Use to clean the bore, chamber and powder-fouled parts.

Notes: This lubricant is an authorized cleaner. Do not mix lubricants on the same

weapon. Dry cleaning solvent Cleans carbon from metal parts.

Note: You must lubricate the weapon after

using dry cleaning solvent. Lubricant, arctic weather (LAW)

Lubricates under cold weather conditions.

Weapon lubricating oil, semi-fluid with Teflon (LSA-T)

Lubricates under extremely cold weather conditions.

Page 190: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-35 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Maintaining

Before Firing The following table lists the maintenance steps to take before firing the

M240G.

Step Action 1 Inspect the weapon for proper cleanliness, mechanical condition

and missing or broken parts.

2 Remove excess oil from the bore, chamber, barrel socket, and the face of the bolt.

3 Check headspace of the barrel by counting the number of clicks when rotating the barrel lock.

Note: A minimum of two clicks, but not more then seven, should

be heard. 4 Place a light coat of CLP on the

�� Operating rod. Lubricate the recesses along the sides that

make contact with the receiver rails. �� Bolt. Place a very small amount of CLP on the upper and

lower locking lugs, the cam roller, and in the bolt camming slot.

�� Receiver. Pull the bolt to the rear and place a line of CLP on

either side of the bolt. Pull the bolt back and forth to spread the CLP over the bolt and receiver rails.

During Firing During firing, maintain a light coat of CLP on the operating rod, bolt, and

receiver. While firing, be sure the connections of the gas system remain tight. Change barrels when necessary.

Continued on next page

Page 191: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-36 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Maintaining, Continued

Reasons to Change Barrels

Change barrels periodically during firing. Use one barrel while the other is cooling. Changing barrels �� Increases the life of each barrel. �� Ensures a continuous rate of accurate fire.

When to Change the Barrel

Change the barrel if �� You fire the sustained rate of fire for 10 minutes (1,000 rounds in 10

minutes). �� You fire the rapid rate of fire for 2 minutes (400 rounds in 2 minutes). �� The barrel becomes so hot that handling it is difficult. �� You have fired a long burst of continuous fire.

Note: The barrel can be changed with the bolt forward or to the rear.

After Firing The following table lists the maintenance steps to take after firing the

M240G.

Step Action 1 Clean the weapon with CLP, RBC, or dry cleaning solvent.

2 Clean the weapon for three consecutive days after firing to remove all carbon deposits.

3 After the cleaning each day, wipe off all cleaning materials and place a light coat of CLP on all metal parts.

4 Clean nonmetallic portions of the gun with hot water, rags and nonabrasive brush.

Continued on next page

Page 192: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-37 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Maintaining, Continued

General Maintenance Notes

If the weapon is fired daily, repeated detailed disassembly will cause unnecessary wear. You can perform adequate cleaning on a weapon that has been disassembled into the five main groups.

Clean the M122 tripod and T & E mechanism on the same three consecutive days cleaning cycle as the machinegun. CAUTION: Do not use cleaning materials on the rubber parts of the

weapon. Do not submerge the buffer in any cleaning fluid.

Normal Maintenance

Inspect the weapon daily for rust. Maintain a light coat of CLP on all metal parts except �� The gas piston �� Inside of the gas cylinder �� The buffer

Continued on next page

Page 193: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-38 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Maintaining, Continued

Extreme Environments

In extreme environments, you must take extra precautions for the trouble-free operation of your M240G. The following table shows the precautions you must take in these conditions.

Environment Precautions

Cold climates �� Keep the weapon free of excess lubricants, cleaners, and moisture. All of these can freeze and cause the weapon to operate sluggishly.

�� Use LAW in sustained temperatures of 0o

Fahrenheit or below. �� If you bring the weapon indoors, let it come to

room temperature, wipe it completely dry, and lubricate with a light coat of CLP.

Hot, humid climates �� Inspect more frequently for rust and keep the weapon as free from moisture as possible.

�� Lubricate the weapon properly with CLP.

Generally, a heavier application than normal is required.

Hot, dry climates �� Keep sand and dust from collecting in the working parts of the weapon.

�� Clean the weapon daily with CLP, then wipe dry.

The Teflon coating left by the CLP will be sufficient for the weapon to operate properly.

�� Cover the weapon when not in use.

Page 194: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-39 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Assembling

Sequence The sequence for assembling the M240G is the reverse order of fieldstripping.

�� Assemble and replace the operating group �� Replace the receiver group �� Replace the buttstock �� Replace the trigger housing group �� Replace the barrel

Assembling the Operating Group

The following table lists the steps to assemble and insert the operating group.

Step Action

1 Insert the bolt and operating group into the receiver, aligning the slots with the rails inside the receiver as shown in the figure below.

2 Extend the bolt forward and then push the entire bolt and operating rod assembly inside the receiver.

Continued on next page

Page 195: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-40 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Assembling the Operating Group, continued

Step Action 3 Insert the drive spring rod into the receiver. 4 Press in and down until the spring rod is seated against the

retaining studs inside the receiver as shown in the figure below.

Replacing the Buttstock

The following table lists the steps to replace the buttstock.

Step Action 1 Depress the buttstock release latch. 2 Align the recessed grooves at the front of the buttstock with the

vertical rails at the rear of the receiver and slide down until it locks in place as shown in the figure below.

Continued on next page

Page 196: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-41 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Replacing the Trigger Housing Group

The following table lists the steps to replace the trigger housing group.

Step Action

1 Insert the holding notch on the front of the trigger housing into the recess on the bottom of the receiver.

2 Insert the trigger housing group in and up as shown in the figure below.

3 Replace the spring pin.

Continued on next page

Page 197: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-42 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Replace the Barrel

The following table lists the steps to replace the barrel.

Step Action

1 Insert the gas plug into the gas regulator. 2 Place and rotate the collar over the forward end of the plug and

lock in place.

3 Depress and hold the barrel locking latch. 4 Insert the barrel with the handle in the upright position as shown in

the figure below.

5 Rotate the barrel to the right until is locks. Note: There must be a minimum of two clicks, but mot more then

seven.

Continued on next page

Page 198: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-43 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Replace Feed Tray and Cover

The following table lists the steps to replace the feed tray and cover assembly.

Step Action

1 Align the feed tray guides with receiver brackets.

2 Place the cover over mounting bracket on receiver and push down into closed position as shown in the picture below.

Page 199: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-44 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Inspecting

Guidelines General guidelines for inspecting the M240G are to

�� Always check for cleanliness �� Look for broken, missing, or burred parts �� Test springs for serviceability �� Perform a function check to determine if the weapon is functioning

properly �� Inspect the M240G in an orderly sequence to be sure that no part is

overlooked and time isn't wasted

Sequence The following table lists the suggested sequence for inspecting the M240G.

Step Action 1 Inspect the cover:

�� Pull the feed cam back and forth to be sure that the belt feed

pawl moves properly. �� Carefully check parts and components for serviceability and

proper function. 2 Inspect the safety and proper assembly by performing a function

check as described in the table below.

Step Action 1 Put the safety on F. 2 Pull and ensure the bolt locks to the rear. 3 Return the safety to S and attempt to fire. 4 Put the safety on F and pull the trigger riding bolt

home. Note: If the bolt did not remain to the rear, the sear shoulder or

sear notch is worn. 3 Inspect the forward portion of the receiver rails and the face of the

bolt. 4 Inspect the barrel socket, chamber, and bore for cracks. 5 Inspect the bipod assembly by lowering and raising the legs. 6 Inspect the sights.

Continued on next page

Page 200: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-45 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Inspecting, Continued

Sequence, continued

Step Action

7 Inspect the mount. Be sure the �� Pintle is attached properly �� Tripod is fully extended �� T&E mechanism is positioned correctly so the scales on the

T&E can be read without difficulty 8 Grasp the stock and gently pull the weapon back and forth to test

for inordinate play in the M122 tripod. 9 Determine if the slide lock lever firmly holds the T&E to the

traversing bar. 10 Examine the spare barrel.

Page 201: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-46 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3

Spare Barrel Case

Components The spare barrel case should contain each of the following as shown in the

figure below.

Page 202: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-47 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

10 minutes

Directions Complete exercise items 1 through 8 by performing the action required.

Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Which is an authorized cleaner for the M240G after live fire exercise?

a. Dry cleaning solvent b. CLP c. LSA-T d. LAW

Item 2 The barrel of the M240G should be changed if you fire the sustained rate of

fire for a. 40 minutes (4,000 rounds). b. 30 minutes (3,000 rounds). c. 20 minutes (2,000 rounds). d. 10 minutes (1,000 rounds).

Continued on next page

Page 203: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-48 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Items 3 Through 7

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the step for assembling from column 2 in the correct sequence in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 Correct Sequence

Column 2 Steps for Assembling

___ 3. ___ 4. ___ 5. ___ 6. ___ 7.

a. Replace the receiver group. b. Replace the barrel. c. Replace the buttstock. d. Replace the trigger housing

group. e. Assemble and replace the

operating group.

Item 8 What is a guideline for inspecting M240G?

a. Springs should be serviceable. b. Bolt should be to the rear. c. Safety should be on F. d. T&E mechanism should be turned clockwise until fully seated.

Page 204: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-49 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 b 4-34 2 d 4-36 3 e 4-39 4 a 4-39 5 c 4-40 6 d 4-41 7 b 4-42 8 a 4-44

Page 205: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-50 Study Unit 4, Lesson 3 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 206: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-51 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

LESSON 4

USING THE M240G MACHINEGUN

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson teaches you about the employment of the M240G machinegun

(M240G). It will cover the basics of sighting, firing, malfunctions, stoppages, and immediate action for the M240G.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the major components for correct sight alignment of the M240G. �� Identify the steps used to load the M240G. �� Identify the steps used to clear the M240G. �� Identify the steps to field zero the M240G. �� Identify the steps to change barrels for the M240G. �� Match stoppages and malfunctions to their usual causes. �� Identify the steps to conduct immediate action (IA).

Continued on next page

Page 207: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-52 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 4-51 Sighting 4-53 Loading 4-55 Clearing/Unloading 4-57 Field Zeroing 4-58 Changing Barrels 4-59 Malfunctions, Stoppages, and Immediate Action 4-60 Remedial Action 4-62 Lesson 4 Exercise 4-64

Page 208: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-53 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

Sighting

Components Sighting the M240G machinegun consists of

�� Adjusting the sights �� Obtaining proper sight alignment �� Obtaining proper sight picture

Front Sight The front sight on the barrel is adjustable for elevation and windage and can

be individually zeroed to the machine gun with the combination front sight adjusting tool. �� Adjusting elevation. Rotating the front sight post counterclockwise

brings the point of impact down on the target. �� Adjusting windage. Moving the front sight post to the right moves the

strike of the round to the left on the target.

Rear Sight The rear sight consists of a peep sight aperture on an adjustable leaf slide.

The rear sight can be used horizontally or vertically depending on range. �� The horizontal position is used to ranges of up to 800 meters. �� The vertical position is used to engage targets from 800 meter to 1,800

meters.

Note: The range plate is marked at 100 meter intervals from 200 meters to

1,800 meters.

Continued on next page

Page 209: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-54 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

Sighting, Continued

Sight Alignment

The sights are aligned when the front and the rear sights are in a line, one in front of the other. To correctly align the sights of the M240G, center the top of the front sight blade in the aperture of the rear sight as shown in the figure below.

Sight Picture While maintaining proper sight alignment, align the top edge of the front

sight with the center base of the target to get proper sight picture. This correct sight picture is commonly referred to as center mass.

Page 210: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-55 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

Loading

With a Raised Cover

You can load the M240G with the cover raised or closed. The following table lists the steps to load the M240G with a raised cover.

Step Action

1 Be sure the bolt is forward and the safety is on F. 2 Open the ammunition box by tearing off the tab marked with the

silhouette of a round. 3 Attach the bandoleer to the bandoleer hanger by slipping the loop

on the end of the bandoleer over the hanger. 4 Locate the end of the ammunition belt and pull out the first few

rounds. Note: Be sure the rounds are coming out of the box with the tips

pointed towards the muzzle and the solid part of the links facing up.

5 Place the first round in the feed tray groove. Be sure the retainer pawls have engaged the belt firmly between two rounds.

6 Close the cover and be sure it firmly latches without having to beat on it or force it closed. The gun is now fully loaded.

Continued on next page

Page 211: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-56 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

Loading, Continued

With a Closed Cover

The following table lists the steps to load the M240G with a closed cover.

Step Action

1 Be sure the bolt is forward and the safety is on F. 2 Open the ammunition box by tearing off the tab marked with the

silhouette of a round. 3 Attach the bandoleer to the bandoleer hanger by slipping the loop

on the end of the bandoleer over the hanger. 4 Locate the end of the ammunition belt and pull out the first few

rounds. Note: Be sure the rounds are coming out of the box with the tips

pointed towards the muzzle and the solid part of the facing up.

5 Force the first round into the feedway until you hear a distinct click.

6 Pull the cocking handle to the rear and return the handle forward. The gun is now fully loaded. Note: If the weapon will not be fired immediately, place the

weapon of safe (S).

Page 212: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-57 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

Clearing/Unloading

Procedure The following table lists the steps to clear the M240G.

Step Action 1 Pull the bolt to the rear and place the safety on S. 2 Press the cover latches and raise the cover. 3 Clear the feed tray of ammunition and links. 4 Lift the feed tray and visually inspect the chamber to be sure the

gun is clear.

WARNING: If you suspect there is a round in a hot chamber, do not raise the cover. If the round cooks off with the cover raised, metal fragments can injure you.

Page 213: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-58 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

Field Zeroing

Procedure You can zero the M240G by the 12.7-meter or the field method. The

preferred method is field zeroing. The 12.7-meter method is used to prepare crews for qualification fire. The following table lists the steps to field zero the M240G.

Step Action

1 Select a clearly definable target at a known range between 300 to 700 meters. Set the rear sight slide to the correct range setting.

2 With the T&E mechanism centered, lay the gun on the target and obtain a good sight picture.

3 Fire a three-round burst and freeze. 4 Calculate the mean center of impact.

If… Then…

The center of impact is on target Battlesight zero (BZO) is complete.

The center of impact is not on target

Adjust the front sight post.

Adjusting the front sight

At 200 meters…

Moving the front sight up or down half a turn

Moves the point of impact up or down approximately 4 1/4 inches

Moving the front sight left or right half a turn

Moves the point of impact left or right approximately 3 1/8 inches

5 Fire another three-round burst to confirm zero. Note If the mean point of impact is centered on the target,

zeroing is complete. If not repeat steps 2-4.

Note: To find out how to use the 12.7-meter zeroing method, refer to MCWP 3-15.1, Machineguns and Machinegun Gunnery, pages 3-60 to 3-62.

Page 214: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-59 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

Changing Barrels

Mounted on a Tripod

Changing the barrel takes only a few seconds and the weapon does not have to be cleared to perform the actions listed in the table below. Note: Refer to study unit 4, lesson 3 to review when to change the barrel.

Step Action

1 Stop firing. 2 Place the weapon on safe (S).

Note: If bolt is forward, the weapon will not go on safe.

3 Be sure the gun is locked in position by the T&E mechanism. Note: If the gun is mounted on bipod, lock buttstock into your

right shoulder. 4 Reach forward and release the barrel lock. 5 Put on a heat protective glove. 6 Remove the hot barrel, setting its rear on the spare barrel case or

on some other object to keep it out of the dirt. 7 Grasp spare barrel by changing handle. 8 Insert the barrel into barrel socket on receiver. 9 Lock the barrel into the receiver with the barrel lock and continue

the mission.

Page 215: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-60 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

Malfunctions, Stoppages, and Immediate Action

Malfunctions A malfunction is any failure of the gun to function satisfactorily. The two

most common malfunctions of the M240G are �� Sluggish operation �� Runaway gun Note: Defective ammunition or improper operation of the gun by a crew

member is not considered a malfunction.

Sluggish Operation

Sluggish operation is a malfunction caused by �� Excessive friction. Friction is caused by lack of lubrication or

excessive dirt or carbon in the gas system or on the bolt and receiver rails.

�� The loss of gas in the gas system. The loss of gas is caused by loose

connections in the gas system or a missing gas port plug. To reduce sluggish operation, move the regulator setting to number 2 or 3 position. To correct sluggish operation, clean, lubricate, tighten, or replace parts as required.

Runaway Gun Runaway gun is a malfunction that occurs when the gun continues to fire after

you release the trigger. A runaway gun is usually caused by a worn, broken, or burred sear. To stop a runaway gun �� Twist and break the belt of ammunition �� Expend all remaining rounds

The remedy for a runaway gun is to replace worn parts.

Continued on next page

Page 216: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-61 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

Malfunctions, Stoppages, and Immediate Action, Continued

Stoppages A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of functioning caused by the faulty

action of the gun or defective ammunition. Some common examples are �� Failure to feed �� Failure to fire Note: Stoppages must be cleared quickly and firing must be resumed.

Immediate Action

To maintain a continuous rate of fire, you must quickly and efficiently clear any stoppages that occur. The table below lists the steps to perform immediate action.

Step Action

1 Wait 5 Seconds for a possible hangfire. 2 Within the next five seconds, pull the bolt to the rear and see if

ejecting takes place.

If… Then… Brass is ejected Attempt to fire. Brass is not ejected Place the weapon on safe (S) and

continue with step 3. Note: If you cannot pull the bolt to the rear, assume that a live

round is in the chamber. Place the safety on S. Wait until the barrel reaches air temperature (Cold barrel). Raise the cover, unload, and clear the gun.

3 If the barrel is cold (fired less than 150 rounds during the last 2 minutes) clear the machinegun, reload and attempt to fire.

4 If barrel is hot (fired 150 rounds or more during the last 2 minutes) wait 15 minutes and clear the machinegun.

Page 217: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-62 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

Remedial Action

Definition When immediate action fails to reduce the stoppage, conduct an investigation

into the cause of the problem.

Common Causes of Stoppages

Two common causes of a stoppage that requires remedial action are �� Stuck cartridge �� Ruptured cartridge

Stuck Cartridge

A stuck cartridge can result from the swelling of a cartridge that keeps the extractor from extracting the round from the chamber. The table below lists the steps to clear a stuck cartridge:

Step Action 1 Lock bolt to the rear. 2 Place the weapon on safe (S). 3 Allow the barrel to cool for 15 minutes. 4 Connect a cleaning rod and insert it into the muzzle end.

5 Push the round out through chamber end.

Continued on next page

Page 218: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-63 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4

Remedial Action, Continued

Ruptured Cartridge Case

The extractor sometimes tears the base of the cartridge off as the bolt moves to the rear, leaving the cartridge wedged inside the chamber. The table below list the steps to clear this stoppage.

Step Action 1 Remove the barrel from the receiver. 2 Insert the extractor into the chamber where it can grip the cartridge.

3 Pull the extractor and remove the remains of the cartridge.

Page 219: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-64 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

10 minutes

Directions Complete exercise items 1 through 7 by performing the action required.

Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What does the figure below represent?

a. Correct sight Alignment b. Correct sight Picture c. Correct aiming d. Correct sight Aperture

Item 2 While loading the M240G with the cover raised, where do you place the first

round? a. In the chamber b. In the feed tray groove c. Directly over the belt-holding pawl d. Just to the left of the belt-feeding pawl

Item 3 To clear the M240G, you must pull the bolt to the rear, place the weapon on

safe, raise the cover, clear the feed tray, and a. twist and bread the belt of ammunition. b. visually inspect the chamber. c. wait until the barrel cools to air temperature. d. expend all remaining rounds down range.

Continued on next page

Page 220: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-65 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 What is the proper setting for the T&E mechanism when field zeroing?

a. Slid to the far left of the traversing bar b. As close to being centered as possible c. Slid to the far right of the traversing bar d. Right 200

Item 5 The T&E mechanism needs to be ________ when changing M20G barrels.

a. locked b. centered c. level d. open

Item 6 The most common malfunctions of the M240G are

a. excessive friction and loss of gas in the gas system. b. defective ammunition and improper operation. c. failure to feed and defective belt. d. sluggish operation and runaway gun.

Item 7 You are a machinegun team leader. While firing on the range, your gun has a

stoppage. What is the first thing that your gunner should do? a. Wait five seconds for a hangfire. b. Observe the ejection port while pulling the bolt to the rear. c. Wait until the barrel cools to air temperature. d. Perform subsequent action. e. Lubricate the weapon and inspect all parts.

Page 221: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 4-66 Study Unit 4, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 a 4-54 2 b 4-55 3 b 4-57 4 b 4-58 5 a 4-59 6 d 4-60 7 a 4-61

Page 222: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-1 Study Unit 5

STUDY UNIT 5

M2HB .50-CALIBER MACHINEGUN

Overview

Estimated Study Time

2 hours, 15 minutes

Unit Scope This study unit is designed to give you the characteristics, operation,

maintenance, immediate action, care and cleaning techniques, and firing procedures for the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun.

Learning Objectives

After completing this unit, you should be able to �� Identify the characteristics and capabilities of the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun. �� Identify how to maintain the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. �� Identify the steps to employing the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. �� Identify how to troubleshoot malfunctions and stoppages for the M2HB

.50-caliber machinegun.

In This Study Unit

This study unit contains the following lessons:

Topic See Page

Lesson 1 Description 5-3 Lesson 2 Clearing, Disassembling, Cleaning, and Inspecting 5-19 Lesson 3 Assembling and Conducting the Function Check 5-35 Lesson 4 Sighting, Firing, and Conducting Immediate

Action 5-51

Page 223: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-2 Study Unit 5

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 224: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-3 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

LESSON 1

DESCRIPTION

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the basic characteristics of the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun and the ammunition it uses.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the capabilities of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. �� Describe the principal characteristics of the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun. �� Identify the different types of mounts and accessories for the M2HB .50-

caliber machinegun. �� Identify the standard types of ammunition for the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun based on color and use. �� Identify the steps in the cycle of operation for the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun.

Continued on next page

Page 225: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-4 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 5-3 Role and Capabilities 5-5 General Characteristics 5-6 Mounts and Accessories 5-10 Ammunition 5-13 Cycle of Operation 5-14 Lesson 1 Exercise 5-16

Page 226: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-5 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

Role and Capabilities

Role The M2HB .50-caliber machinegun supports the infantryman in both the

offense and the defense by providing a heavy volume of accurate, long-range fire.

Five Capabilities

The five capabilities of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun are to �� Support the infantryman in the offense and the defense �� Provide

�� A heavy volume of close, accurate, and continuous fire when in an attack

�� Long range, close defensive, and final protective fires as part of a

unit’s defensive lines �� Reconnaissance by fire on suspected enemy positions

�� Protect motorized movements �� Defend against low-flying, hostile aircraft �� Destroy lightly armored vehicles

Page 227: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-6 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

General Characteristics

M2HB .50-caliber Machinegun

The operator must understand the characteristics of the .50-caliber machinegun to have success on the battlefield The picture below shows the Browning M2HB .50-caliber machinegun on an M3 tripod mount.

Continued on next page

Page 228: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-7 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

General Characteristics, Continued

Major Components

The M2HB .50-caliber machinegun can be broken down into eight major components pictured below.

Continued on next page

Page 229: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-8 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

General Characteristics, Continued

Weight The following table lists the weight of the major parts of the M2HB .50-

caliber machinegun.

Component Part Weight (in pounds) Receiver group 60 Barrel Approximately 24 M3 tripod mount 44 Total weight Approximately 128

Length The following table lists the length of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun.

Item Length (in inches) Length of barrel 45 Length of gun, overall Approximately 65

Range The following table lists the range of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun.

Type of Range Range (in meters) Maximum 6,767 Maximum Effective 1,830 Grazing fire 700

Continued on next page

Page 230: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-9 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

General Characteristics, Continued

Rates of Fire The following table lists the rates of fire of the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun.

Type of Fire Rate (rounds per minute) Sustained Less the 40 Rapid More than 40 Cyclic 400-550

Muzzle Velocity The muzzle velocity of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun is 3,050 feet per

second.

Descriptive Characteristics

The M2HB .50-caliber machinegun is �� Belt-fed. By repositioning some of its component parts, the gun is

capable of alternate feed (ammunition can be fed from either the right or left sides). The infantry generally uses left side feed. A disintegrating metallic link belt is used for feeding.

�� Air-cooled. The maximum surface of the barrel and receiver is exposed

to permit air-cooling. Perforations in the barrel support allow air to circulate around the breech end of the barrel and help in cooling the parts. The heavy barrel is used to delay early overheating.

�� Recoil-operated. The expanding powder gases (which various springs,

cams, and levers control) provide the force for recoil operation.

Page 231: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-10 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

Mounts and Accessories

Purpose You must mount the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun to fire. Along with the

mount, you need to install a traversing and elevating mechanism to permit a high degree of accuracy and control.

M3 Tripod Mount

The M3 tripod mount is the principal ground mount for the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun shown in the picture below.

The tripod has three folding, telescopic legs that can be stomped into the ground for greater stability. The gun is connected to the tripod by a pintle that is semi-permanently attached to the gun. The pintle seats into the tripod head and is locked in place. A traversing bar between the two trail legs serves as a support for the traversing and elevating (T&E) mechanism. The T&E mechanism attaches to the rear of the gun and is locked onto the traversing bar.

Continued on next page

Page 232: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-11 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

Mounts and Accessories, Continued

Pintle Vehicle Mount

The M2HB .50-caliber machinegun can be mounted on two different mounts: �� High mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle (HMMWV) weapons station �� M66 ring mount Each of these mounts has a pintle adapter that accepts the pintle shown below.

HMMWV Weapons Station

The HMMWV weapons station has a ring mount that, used with the MK64 cradle mount, will accept the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun, as pictured below.

Continued on next page

Page 233: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-12 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

Mounts and Accessories, Continued

M66 Ring Mount

The M66 ring mount is installed on trucks and other combat vehicles. A truck mounted version is shown below.

T&E Mechanism

Used on both ground and vehicle mounts, the T&E mechanism for the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun �� Secures the rear of the machinegun to its mount. �� Permits fire control adjustment. �� Allows the machinegun to traverse 400 mils to the left or right of the 0

index on the traversing bar on the M3 tripod mount. �� Allows the elevation of the machinegun to range from 100 mils in

elevation to 250 mils in depression.

Note: For more information on the T&E mechanism, see study unit 7.

AN/TVS-5 Night Vision Sight

The AN/TVS-5 night vision sight, used for passive night observation and fire, can be mounted on the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. Portable and battery operated, the AN/TVS-5 night vision sight amplifies natural light such as moonlight, starlight, and skyglow without emitting visible or infrared light that the enemy can detect.

Page 234: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-13 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

Ammunition

Ammunition Types

The M2HB .50-caliber machinegun cartridge consists of a cartridge case, primer, propelling charge, and bullet. The table below describes the types of ammunition, each identifiable by the color of the tip.

Type Color of tip Used for

Ball (M2, M33)

No color �� Marksmanship training �� Anti-personnel �� Light material targets

Tracer (M1, M10, M17)

Red, maroon, or orange �� Aiding in observing fire �� Incendiary effect �� Signaling

Armor-piercing (M2)

Black �� Armored aircraft �� Lightly armored

vehicles �� Concrete shelters �� Other bullet-resisting

targets Incendiary (M1, M23)

Blue or light blue Incendiary effect, especially against aircraft

Armor-piercing incendiary (M8)

Aluminum-colored Combined armor-piercing and incendiary effect

Armor-piercing incendiary tracer (M20)

Aluminum with red tip �� Combined armor-piercing and incendiary effect

�� Additional tracer features

Blank (M1, M1A1)

No bullet Simulated firing

Dummy (M2)

No color on tip; holes in cartridge case

Instructional purposes (completely inert)

Sabot light armor penetrator (SLAP) M903

Plastic sleeve on projectile Armor piercing

Page 235: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-14 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

Cycle of Operation

Eight Steps The cycle of operation of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun consists of the

following eight steps:

Step Action 1 Firing. The firing pin is released, igniting the primer of the

cartridge.

2 Unlocking. The bolt is unlocked from the barrel and barrel extension.

3 Extracting. The empty cartridge case is pulled from the chamber.

Continued on next page

Page 236: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-15 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1

Cycle of Operation, Continued

Eight Steps, continued

Step Action

4 Ejecting. The empty cartridge case is expelled from the receiver. 5 Cocking. The firing pin is withdrawn into the cocked position. 6 Feeding. During feeding, the cartridge is placed in the receiver.

7 Chambering. During chambering, the cartridge is placed into the chamber of the weapon.

8 Locking. The bolt is locked to the barrel and barrel extension.

Page 237: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-16 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

10 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 11 by performing the actions required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Which one of the following is a capability of the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun? a. Destroys heavily armored vehicles b. Defends against aircraft at high altitudes c. Protects motorized movements d. Supports the infantryman only in the attack

Item 2 What are the three descriptive characteristics of the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun? a. Belt-fed, air-cooled, gas operated b. Belt-fed, water-cooled, recoil-operated c. Magazine-fed, air-cooled, blowback-operated d. Belt-fed, air-cooled, recoil-operated

Continued on next page

Page 238: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-17 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Items 3 Through 5

Matching: In the spaces provided, place the letter of the function from column 2 that corresponds to the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun mount in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be only used once.

Column 1 Mount

Column 2 Function

___ 3. M66 ring mount ___ 4. Vehicle mount ___ 5. M3 tripod

a. Is the principal ground mount b. Is installed on trucks and other

combat vehicles c. Uses a pintle adaptor that accepts

the gun's pintle d. Secures the rear of the M2HB

.50-caliber machine to its mounts

Items 6 Through 10

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the color of the tip from column 2 that best describes the type of M2HB .50-caliber ammunition in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 Type of Ammunition

Column 2 Color of Tip

___ 6. Ball ___ 7. Armor-piercing ___ 8. Incendiary ___ 9. Armor-piercing incendiary

tracer ___ 10. Tracer

a. Black b. Red, maroon, or orange c. No color d. Blue or light blue ring with blue

tip e. Aluminum ring with red tip

Item 11 What step in the cycle of operation places the cartridge into the chamber of

the weapon? a. Locking b. Feeding c. Chambering d. Ejecting

Continued on next page

Page 239: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-18 Study Unit 5, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 c 5-5 2 d 5-9 3 b 5-12 4 c 5-11 5 a 5-10 6 c 5-13 7 a 5-13 8 d 5-13 9 e 5-13 10 b 5-13 11 c 5-15

Page 240: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-19 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

LESSON 2

CLEARING, DISASSEMBLING, CLEANING, AND INSPECTING

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses how to clear, disassemble, clean, and inspect the M2HB

.50-caliber machinegun.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the steps to clear the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. �� Identify the steps to disassemble the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. �� Identify the maintenance schedule for the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun. �� Identify the cleaners and lubricants by function for the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun. �� Identify the steps to clean the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. �� Identify the steps for inspecting the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun.

Continued on next page

Page 241: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-20 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 5-19 Clearing 5-21 Disassembling 5-22 Cleaning 5-29 Inspecting 5-31 Lesson 2 Exercise 5-32

Page 242: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-21 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

Clearing

Procedures Before you begin disassembly of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun, you

must clear it to make sure it is completely safe. The steps to clear the weapon are listed in the table below.

Step Action

1 Place the gun in the single shot mode by rotating the buffer tube sleeve to the right and releasing the bolt latch to the up position as shown in the picture below.

2 Raise the feed cover by rotating the cover latch forward and lifting straight up as shown in the picture below.

3 Remove ammunition if present. 4 Close the feed cover assembly. 5 Grasp the slide handle and lock the bolt to the rear. 6 Open the feed cover assembly. 7 Inspect the T slot on the face of the bolt and chamber. 8 Press the bolt latch release and ride the bolt forward. 9 Close the feed cover assembly.

Note: Never close the cover with the bolt to the rear.

Page 243: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-22 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

Disassembling

Procedures After you clear the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun, you may begin

disassembly into the six main groups for cleaning and inspection. Disassembly consists of the following sequential steps:

Step Action...removing the

1 Barrel group 2 Backplate 3 Drive spring rod assembly 4 Bolt group 5 Barrel extension 6 Barrel buffer body 7 Barrel buffer assembly

Components

The picture below shows the components of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun.

Continued on next page

Page 244: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-23 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Barrel Group Disassembling the barrel group consists of the steps listed in the table below.

Step Action 1 Turn the cover latch and raise the cover group as shown below.

2 Pull the retracting handle back until the lug on the barrel locking spring aligns with the 3/8-inch hole on the right side of the receiver.

3 Turn the barrel clockwise until it disengages.

4 Set the barrel aside, being careful not to damage the threaded end.

Continued on next page

Page 245: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-24 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Backplate To remove the backplate, follow the steps listed in the table below.

Step Action 1 Pull out on the backplate latch lock and up on the backplate latch

as shown in the picture below. Note the placement of the hands in the picture.

2 Lift the entire backplate straight up. 3 Set the backplate aside with the handles down.

Continued on next page

Page 246: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-25 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Drive Spring Rod Assembly

The drive spring on the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun is located on the right side of the receiver as shown in the picture below.

The table below lists the steps to remove the drive spring.

Removing the Drive Spring

Step Action

1 Push in on the head of the drive spring and then slightly to the left to unseat it from the right side plate. WARNING: Never attempt to cock the gun while the backplate is

off and the drive spring is in place. The drive spring can seriously injure you if it is compressed and slips from its seat in the sideplate.

2 Pull the drive spring to the rear and out of the receiver.

Continued on next page

Page 247: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-26 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Bolt Group Remove the bolt group from the receiver by following the steps listed in the

table below.

Step Action 1 Grasp the retracting slide handle and give it a quick jerk, freeing

the bolt from the barrel extension. 2 Align the collar of the bolt stud with the clearance hole in the bolt

slot on the right sideplate and remove the bolt stud as shown below.

3 Slide the bolt to the rear and out of receiver as shown below.

4 Place the bolt down on its right side (with the extractor arm up) so that the extractor will not fall from the bolt.

Continued on next page

Page 248: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-27 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Barrel Extension and Buffer Body Group

The following table lists the steps to remove the barrel buffer body group and the barrel extension group from the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun.

Step Action

1 Insert a combination tool (or pointed instrument) through the hole in the lower rear corner of the right sideplate.

2 Push in on the barrel buffer body lock. At the same time, place one hand on the receiver and push the barrel extension and barrel buffer body groups to the rear as shown in the picture below.

3 Remove both groups from the receiver. 4 Separate the two groups by pushing forward on the tips of the

accelerator as shown below.

Continued on next page

Page 249: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-28 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Barrel Buffer Assembly

The last step to disassembly is to pull the barrel buffer assembly from the rear of the barrel buffer body group as shown below:

Page 250: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-29 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

Cleaning

Maintenance Schedule

Care, cleaning, and maintenance determine whether or not your machinegun will function properly when you need it. You should maintain your M2HB .50-caliber machinegun on a regular basis. As a general rule, you should clean your gun �� After firing �� At least daily when under combat/field conditions �� Several times per day when under extreme climatic conditions �� For three consecutive days upon returning from the field �� Every five days when the gun is in storage

Cleaners and Lubricants

The following table lists several types and functions of cleaners and lubricants that you may use to clean the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun.

Type Function

Cleaner-lubricant-preservative (CLP)

Cleans, lubricates, and preserves. Note: This is the preferred material for cleaning the

.50-caliber machinegun. Rifle bore cleaner (RBC)

Cleans powder residue, carbon, and dirt. Note: You must lubricate the gun after using RBC.

PL special (lubricating oil, general purpose)

Lubricates and preserves. Note: The thin oil may be used as a temporary measure

to lubricate entire weapon if you do not have CLP.

Lubricant, semi-fluid, automatic weapons (LSA)

Used on friction-producing parts and on the exterior of the weapon. Note: This thicker oil lasts longer than CLP and will

not burn off by firing or wash away with rain. Lubricant, arctic weather (LAW)

Used for extremely cold weather (below 0o Fahrenheit).

Hot, soapy water Used on the barrel when RBC or CLP are not available. Note: Dry barrel and apply a thin coat of PL special

after using hot, soapy water.

Continued on next page

Page 251: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-30 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

Cleaning, Continued

Procedure After you disassemble the gun into its major components, you can begin to

clean the different parts. The following table lists the steps to properly clean the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun.

Step Action

1 Inspect all parts for cracks, burrs, wear, or rust. 2 Clean the bore and chamber with RBC and lightly oil with PL

special. Or, use CLP to clean and lubricate. 3 Clean all metal parts thoroughly and apply a light coat of CLP.

Notes: Do not apply CLP to the metal parts that may contact the

ammunition.

Do not use cleaning agents or CLP on plastic or wooden parts.

4 Reassemble the weapon. Be sure the exterior is lightly oiled. 5 Clean and lubricate the mount and accessories.

Page 252: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-31 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2

Inspecting

Procedure When you conduct an inspection, the machinegun should be completely

assembled and mounted with headspace and timing properly set. The following table lists the steps to inspect the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun.

Step Action

1 Inspect the bore and chamber for rust. Be sure they are clean and lightly lubricated.

2 Operate the retracting slide handle and the bolt latch release several times to see if the parts function without excessive friction. Be sure that moving parts are lightly lubricated.

3 Check headspace and timing with gauges. 4 Be sure the rear sight is in good condition, clean, and lightly

lubricated. Set the elevation to 1000 and windage to zero. 5 Inspect the mount to be sure it is clean, lightly lubricated, and all

clamps are securely tightened. 6 Inspect spare parts and tools to be sure they are clean.

Page 253: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-32 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

10 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 though 6 by performing the actions required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What is the last step you must accomplish to clear the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun? a. Close the feed cover and pull the bolt to the rear. b. Close the feed cover assembly. c. Place the machinegun in the single shot mode. d. Pull the retracting slide handle to the rear.

Item 2 After removing the barrel from the receiver of the M2HB 50-caliber

machinegun, the next procedure for disassembling is to remove the a. backplate. b. T-block. c. bolt. d. drive spring.

Item 3 While deployed in a desert environment with constant high winds and sand

storms, the maintenance schedule that must be followed to keep the units M2HB .50-caliber machinegun in proper working order is to clean it a. after firing. b. several times per day. c. at least daily. d. for three consecutive days.

Continued on next page

Page 254: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-33 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 What is the preferred cleaner/lubricant for use on your M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun? a. RBC b. CLP c. PL special d. Hot soapy water

Item 5 Four of the five steps to clean the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun are listed

below: 1. Disassemble the machinegun into its main groups. Inspect all parts for

cracks, burrs, wear, or rust. 2. Clean the bore and chamber with RBC, then lightly oil with PL special; or

use CLP. 3. Clean all metal parts thoroughly and apply a light coat of CLP. 4. Reassemble the weapon, and ensure that the exterior is lightly oiled. Which step is missing for cleaning the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun? a. Remove the backplate. b. Remove the T block. c. Use CLP to clean all metal parts that may contact ammunition. d. Clean and lubricate the mount and accessories.

Item 6 What is the first step in inspecting the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun?

a. Check headspace and timing with gauge. b. Inspect spare parts and tools to be sure the are clean. c. Inspect the bore and chamber for rust and be sure they are lightly

lubricated. d. Inspect the mount to be sure it is clean, lightly lubricated, and that all

clamps are securely tightened.

Continued on next page

Page 255: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-34 Study Unit 5, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 b 5-21 2 a 5-22 3 b 5-29 4 b 5-29 5 d 5-30 6 c 5-31

Page 256: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-35 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

LESSON 3

ASSEMBLING AND CONDUCTING THE FUNCTION CHECK

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses how to assemble and perform a function check on the

M2HB .50-caliber machinegun.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson you should be able to �� Identify the steps to assemble the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. �� Identify the steps to perform a function check on the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page

Introduction 5-35 Assembling 5-36 Performing a Function Check 5-41 Lesson 3 Exercise 5-49

Page 257: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-36 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Assembling

Procedure To assemble the .50-caliber machinegun, replace the groups in the reverse

order of disassembly. Assembly is accomplished by completing the procedures below. �� Connect the barrel buffer group �� Install the barrel buffer and extension groups �� Install the bolt stud �� Replace the drive spring �� Replace the backplate �� Replace the barrel

Connecting the Barrel Buffer Group

The following table lists the steps to connect the barrel buffer assembly and the barrel buffer body.

Step Action 1 Turn the barrel buffer tube until the screwdriver slot in the rear of

the tube is vertical and the arrow points to right, as shown below:

2 Push the barrel buffer assembly fully forward, as shown below:

Continued on next page

Page 258: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-37 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Install the Barrel Buffer and Extension Groups

The following table lists the steps to join the barrel buffer and the barrel extension groups.

Step Action 1 Hold the barrel buffer group in your right hand with your index

finger supporting the accelerator. 2 Join the notch on the shank of the barrel extension group with the

cross-groove in the piston rod of the barrel buffer assembly. At the same time, align the breech lock depressors with the guideways in the sides of the barrel extension, as shown below.

3 Push the groups together. Note: The accelerator should rotate rearward.

4 Place the groups in the receiver and push them forward until the barrel buffer body spring lock snaps into position. Note: The barrel buffer tube should protrude about 1 1/8 inches

from the rear of the barrel buffer body group.

Continued on next page

Page 259: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-38 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Install Bolt Stud

The following table lists the steps to install the bolt stud and lock the barrel buffer, barrel extension group, and the bolt into receiver.

Step Action 1 Look at the bolt to be sure the extractor assembly is down and the

cocking lever is inclined to the front. 2 Align the rails on the bolt with the grooves on the barrel extension

and slide bolt about halfway onto the barrel extension. 3 Insert the barrel buffer, barrel extension, and bolt into the back of

the receiver as shown below.

Note: You should hear two clicks �� One for the body lock snapping in �� Another for the bolt latch connecting with the top of the

receiver. 4 Press up on the bolt latch and push the bolt forward until the hole

is aligned with the clearance hole on the right side of the receiver. 5 Replace the bolt stud and push the bolt as far forward as you can,

as shown below.

Continued on next page

Page 260: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-39 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Replace the Drive Spring

The following table lists the steps to replace the drive spring.

Step Action

1 Insert the spring into its hole in the rear of the bolt and push it all the way in.

2 Press in and to the right until the retaining pin slips into the hole on the right sideplate. Note: The spring will be slightly compressed.

3 If the buffer does not go all the way into the receiver with the bolt, take the barrel buffer, barrel extension, and bolt out of the receiver and repeat the above steps.

Replace the Backplate

The following table lists the steps to replace the backplate.

Step Action

1 Pull the backplate latch lock out and slide the backplate onto the back of the receiver.

2 Continue to hold the backplate latch lock out and lightly tap the backplate down with your hand until it is all the way down as shown in the picture below.

3 Release the latch.

Continued on next page

Page 261: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-40 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Replace the Barrel

The following table lists the steps to replace the barrel.

Step Action

1 Pull back the retracting slide handle until the lug on the barrel locking spring is visible through the 3/8-inch hole in the right sideplate.

2 Place the smallest loop of a .50-caliber link between the trunnion block and the barrel extension. Note: If a link isn’t available, you can hold this alignment by

hand. 3 Place the barrel into the front of the receiver and carefully start the

threads. 4 Screw the barrel all the way in, then back it off two clicks. 5 Close the cover and remove the link if you used one.

Summary Assembling the components of the M2HB 50 caliber machinegun is just the

first step of operator maintenance. The next step is to ensure that the weapon is properly assembled.

Page 262: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-41 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check

Schedule A function check of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun ensures that the

weapon is correctly assembled and should also be preformed before firing to ensure the weapon is in working order. Important: You must set headspace and adjusting timing before conducting

a function check.

Headspace Definition

Headspace is the distance between the face of the bolt and the chamber when a round is fully seated in the chamber.

Setting Headspace

Setting proper headspace is critical to operation of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. The correct headspace allows room for the rim of the round when chambered. The following table describes the results of incorrect headspace.

If the headspace is set too… Then…

Tight Firing will be sluggish and slow. Loose Cartridge cases may bulge or even

explode in the receiver.

Continued on next page

Page 263: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-42 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check, Continued

Headspace Gauge

To set headspace on the M2HB 50 caliber machinegun the operator needs the gauges shown below.

Continued on next page

Page 264: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-43 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check, Continued

Setting Headspace

Follow the steps in the table below to set headspace.

Step Action

1 Ensure the gun cleared and the bolt is forward. 2 Pull back on the retracting slide handle until the locking spring lug

aligns with the 3/8-inch hole on the right sideplate as shown in the picture below. Back barrel off two clicks from tight.

3 Grasp the retracting slide handle and pull the bolt to the rear, thus cocking the weapon.

4 Pull the bolt back 1/16-inch and raise the extractor arm up. 5 Insert the GO end of the headspace gauge between the face of the

bolt and the chamber as shown below.

Continued on next page

Page 265: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-44 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check, Continued

Setting Headspace, continued

Step Action 6 If the GO end

�� Fits, go to step 7. �� Does not fit, go to step 8.

7 Turn the gauge over and try to insert the NO GO end. If the NO GO end �� Does not fit, headspace is correct. You have completed setting

headspace. �� Fits, go to step 9.

8 Unscrew the barrel one click and repeat step 5. 9 Screw the barrel in one click and try to insert the GO end of the

headspace gauge. Repeat step 6.

Continued on next page

Page 266: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-45 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check, Continued

Timing Timing is achieved by adjusting the machinegun so that the moving parts do

the right thing at the right time during the cycle of operation. Firing actually takes place just before the bolt is all the way forward. The machinegun must be adjusted to be sure this happens. Timing must be checked and adjusted each time headspace is set or when timing is questionable

Timing Gauges The picture below shows the placement of the timing gauges between the bolt

and barrel assembly. In this case, the fire gauge has been inserted.

Preparing the Machinegun

The operator must ensure the following items from the table below are completed before adjusting timing. Note: Timing must be checked every time headspace is completed.

Step Action

1 Cock the machinegun 2 Ride the bolt slowly home 3 Raise the feed cover 4 Raise the extractor

Continued on next page

Page 267: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-46 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check, Continued

Adjusting Timing

After ensuring the weapon is prepared, perform the following steps from the table below to adjust timing.

Step Action

1 Pull the retracting handle back until you have a ¼-inch space between the barrel extension and the trunnion block.

2 Insert the NO-Fire gauge between the barrel extension and the trunnion block with the beveled edge of the gauge resting on the barrel notches, as shown below:

3 Slowly let the barrel extension close by releasing the retracting slide handle.

4 Depress the trigger; and refer to the table below:

If weapon does Then go to Not fire Step 16 Fires Step 5

5 Remove gauge and cock weapon. 6 Insert the Fire gauge, as stated in step 2. 7 Remove backplate. 8 Screw the timing adjustment nut, as shown in the picture below, to

the left until it rests lightly on the trigger lever.

Continued on next page

Page 268: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-47 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check, Continued

Adjusting Timing, continued

Step Action 9 Turn the adjustment nut to the right one click. 10 With firm upward pressure, push up on the trigger lever as shown

in the picture below.

11 Repeat steps 9 through 10 until the firing pin releases (fires). 12 When the firing pin releases, turn the timing adjustment nut two

additional clicks to the right. 13 Replace the backplate and remove the FIRE gauge.

WARNING: Never attempt to cock the machinegun with the

backplate off. 14 Grasp the retracting slide handle, pull the handle back, and release

it to cock weapon. 15 Repeat steps 2 through 4. 16 Insert the FIRE gauge. 17 Try to fire the machinegun by pressing the trigger.

If the machinegun… Then…

Fires Timing is correct, stop. Does not fire Go to step 6.

Continued on next page

Page 269: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-48 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check, Continued

Function Check The operator must ensure the weapon is assembled properly. The table below

lists the procedure to follow.

Step Action 1 Place the weapon in single-shot mode. 2 Open the cover and lock the bolt to the rear. 3 Return the retracting slide handles to full forward position and

press the bolt latch release. 4 Press down on the trigger. The weapon should fire. 5 Place the weapon in the automatic-fire mode. 6 Pull the retractor slide handle to the rear and release. 7 Make sure the firing pin does not protrude. 8 Press down on the trigger. The weapon should fire. 9 Make sure the firing pin does protrude.

Page 270: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-49 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 2 by performing the actions required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What is the next step in assembling the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun after

installing the barrel buffer and extension group? a. Replace the drive spring and T block. b. Replace the barrel buffer group only. c. Install the bolt stud. d. Replace the T block and barrel buffer and barrel extension groups.

Item 2 You are setting headspace and have just inserted the GO end of the headspace

gauge. The GO end did not fit. What is your next step? a. Insert the NO GO end of the headspace gauge. b. Alternate unscrewing the barrel one click and inserting the GO end of the

headspace gauge until it fits. c. Your headspace is correct. Continue with the function check. d. Take the machinegun to armory for maintenance check.

Continued on next page

Page 271: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-50 Study Unit 5, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 c 5-36 2 b 5-44

Page 272: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-51 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

LESSON 4

SIGHTING, FIRING, AND CONDUCTING IMMEDIATE ACTION

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope The objective of this lesson is to discuss how to sight, fire, identify a

malfunction or stoppage, and apply immediate action to the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the definition for sight alignment for the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun. �� Identify the two firing modes for the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. �� Identify firing positions for the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. �� Identify the types of malfunctions for the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. �� Identify common stoppages for the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun. �� Identify the steps of immediate action for the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun.

Continued on next page

Page 273: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-52 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 5-51 Sighting 5-53 Firing 5-56 Malfunctions and Stoppages 5-60 Immediate Action 5-63 Lesson 4 Exercise 5-64

Page 274: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-53 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

Sighting

Rear Sight The M2HB .50-caliber machinegun has a leaf-type rear sight as shown in the

picture below:

The rear sight is graduated in both yards and mils from 100 to 2,600 yards and from 0 to 62 mils and has two positions.

�� Down. When in the down position as shown in the picture below, it is used for ranges from 0 to 400 yards.

�� Up. When in the up position as shown in the picture below, it is used for ranges from 400 to 2600 yards.

�� In both the up and down positions has a rear sight aperture or peep sight.

Continued on next page

Page 275: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-54 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

Sighting, Continued

Front Sight The front sight is a semifixed blade-type with cover as shown in the picture

below.

Sight Alignment Using the rear sight aperture and the front sight blade in combination is

called sight alignment. Correct sight alignment for the .50-caliber machinegun occurs when the front sight blade is centered and halfway up in the rear sight aperture as shown in the picture below.

Sight Picture A proper sight picture occurs when the top edge of the front sight at the

center base of the target while maintaining sight alignment as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 276: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-55 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

Sighting, Continued

Adjusting Sights You can adjust the rear sight for both elevation and windage as shown in the

picture below.

Elevation To change elevation, turn the elevation knob (on the top of the sight) so that

the index line moves to the required elevation scale line. The odd-numbered elevation scale is on the left and the even-numbered scale is on the right.

Windage To change windage, turn the windage knob (at the bottom on the left side of

the sight) forward or back. The windage knob permits a change of five mils left or right of center.

Page 277: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-56 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

Firing

Two Modes Firing the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun is not complicated. You must load

the gun differently for both modes which include the �� Automatic firing mode �� Single shot mode

Automatic Firing Mode

The table lists the steps to load the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun for the automatic firing mode.

Step Action

1 Clear the machinegun. 2 Close the bolt by pressing the bolt latch release. Use the

retracting slide handle to slowly ride the bolt home. 3 Close the feed cover. 4 Lock down the bolt latch release by pressing down on the bolt

latch release and rotating it to the left until it is locked in the down position. This sets the gun for automatic fire.

5 Insert the belt of ammunition into the feedway until you hear the click of the belt-holding pawl engaging the belt of ammunition.

6 Cock the gun by vigorously pulling back the retracting slide handle and then releasing it. Allowing the drive spring to carry the handle and bolt group forward. This is called half-loading. If the trigger is pushed, the gun will not fire.

7 Be sure to re-cock the gun as you did in step 6 so that the gun is fully loaded. Now, when you push the trigger, the machinegun will fire in the automatic mode.

Continued on next page

Page 278: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-57 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

Firing, Continued

Single Shot Mode

The following table lists the steps to load the .50-caliber machinegun so that it fires one round at a time.

Step Action

1 Clear the machinegun. 2 Close the bolt by pressing the bolt latch release. Use the

retracting slide handle to slowly ride the bolt home. 3 Close the feed cover. 4 With the bolt latch release in the up position, be sure the bolt latch

release lock is to the right. The gun is now set for single shot firing.

5 Insert the belt of ammunition into the feedway until you hear a click.

6 Cock the gun by vigorously pulling back the retracting slide handle. The bolt will lock to the rear.

7 Push the bolt latch release allowing the drive spring to carry the bolt group forward. The gun is now half-loaded.

8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to fully load the gun. When the trigger is pushed, the gun will fire one round and then the bolt will lock to the rear.

9 To fire another round, you must first push down on the bolt release, allowing the bolt to go home under the power of the drive spring.

Continued on next page

Page 279: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-58 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

Firing, Continued

Firing Positions When the .50-caliber machinegun is mounted on the M3 tripod, you can use

the �� Prone position �� Two types of sitting positions

�� Legs folded �� Legs extended

In any of these three positions, your grip will be the same. With your right hand on the spade grip and your thumb in position to press the trigger, use a light grip with a slight downward pressure. Your left hand should be palm down on the elevating hand wheel and applying a slight downward pressure. When you fire, use long bursts (8 to 10 rounds) and watch for the impact to make adjustments. When the machinegun is mounted on a vehicle mount, place both hands on the spade grips with your thumbs in position to press the trigger. Keep your elbows tucked in to your sides and lean forward until your chest touches your hands. Brace your body and arms firmly during firing.

Continued on next page

Page 280: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-59 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

Firing, Continued

Field Zeroing Field zeroing is adjusting the sights so that the rounds will hit where the

sights are pointing. The following table lists the steps to field zero the .50-caliber machinegun.

Step Action

1 Determine the range to the target. 2 Adjust the rear sight for elevation according to the range you just

determined in step 1. 3 Center the windage scale by turning the windage knob until the

centerlines are aligned. Be sure the bolt is forward now with a round in the chamber.

4 Obtain proper sight alignment and sight picture on the target using the traversing and elevating handwheels.

5 Fire one round and observe the strike. If the round �� Hits where you are aiming, the gun is zeroed.

�� Does not hit where you are aiming, go to step 6.

6 Without moving the gun, sight in on the point of impact. Note: Move the rear sight elevation and windage knobs, not

the traversing and elevating handwheels! 7 Press the bolt latch release to send the bolt forward, chambering

another round. 8 Obtain sight alignment and sight picture on the original target

using the traversing and elevating handwheels. 9 Fire one round and observe where the round hits. If the round

�� Hits where you were aiming, the gun is zeroed. �� Does not hit where you were aiming, repeat steps 6 through 9

until a round hits the target.

Page 281: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-60 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

Malfunctions and Stoppages

Malfunctions Malfunctions and stoppages can occur at any time when you fire the .50-

caliber machinegun. You and your crew must know what the problem is and how to correct it. A malfunction is any failure of the gun to function satisfactorily. Normally the two types of malfunctions are �� Failure to function freely (sluggish operation). It is usually

�� Due to human failure to eliminate excessive friction caused by dirt, lack of proper lubrication, burred parts, tight headspace adjustment, or incorrect timing.

�� Corrected by cleaning, lubricating, and resetting headspace and

timing.

�� Uncontrollable automatic fire (runaway gun), which is continued fire after you release the trigger. It is

�� Always caused by defective parts. �� Corrected by keeping the gun laid in on target and twisting the

ammunition belt, so the gun jams. If only a few rounds are on the belt, let the gun fire them out. Report the problem to your armorer.

Continued on next page

Page 282: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-61 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

Malfunctions and Stoppages, Continued

Stoppages A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of operation caused by the faulty

action of the gun or ammunition. The following table lists the common stoppages, their causes, and steps to correct them.

Type of Stoppage Usual Causes Steps to Correct It

Failure to feed Defective ammunition belt �� Defective feed

mechanism �� Improperly

loaded belt

Change ammunition belt. Check the feedway by pushing down on the feed pawls to be sure enough spring tension exists to hold the belt place.

Obstruction in T-slot or chamber

Inspect the chamber and the T-slot for an obstruction or dirt, then clear them. You may use a cleaning rod or other tool to help push the obstruction (usually a cartridge case) out of the bottom of the receiver.

Failure to chamber

Ruptured case If a ruptured cartridge case is stuck in the chamber, try to force it out by inserting a cleaning rod into the muzzle of the weapon and pushing. If this fails, you must use a ruptured cartridge case extractor.

Failure to fire �� Defective ammunition

�� Defective parts in firing mechanism

Change the ammunition belt. Inspect parts of firing mechanism for defects.

Continued on next page

Page 283: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-62 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

Malfunctions and Stoppages, Continued

Using the Ruptured Cartridge Case Extractor

The following table lists the steps to use the ruptured cartridge case extractor shown in the picture below.

Step Action

1 Raise the cover and pull the bolt to the rear. 2 Place the ruptured case extractor in the T-slot of the bolt, as you

would a cartridge. The ejector of the extractor assembly will hold the extractor in line with the bore.

3 With the ruptured cartridge extractor aligned, let the bolt go forward. This forces the extractor through the ruptured case, and the shoulders will spring out in front of the case.

4 Pull the bolt to rear and remove the ruptured case and the extractor.

Page 284: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-63 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4

Immediate Action

Procedure Immediate action is the procedure you use when a stoppage of fire occurs and

you cannot stop to analyze its cause. The gunner usually performs immediate action; however, every crewmember must know how to apply it. The following table lists the steps to take immediate action.

Step Action

1 Wait 5 seconds. A hang-fire may be causing the misfire. If the gun is very hot, it may “cook off” the round.

2 Cock the gun and observe for feeding and ejecting. 3 Re-lay on target. 4 Try to fire.

If the gun… Then…

Fires Continue with your mission. Does not fire Go to step 5.

5 Repeat steps 1 through 4.

If the gun… Then… Fires Continue with your mission. Does not fire Clear the gun and inspect it to

determine the cause of the stoppage.

Page 285: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-64 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

10 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 10 by performing the action required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 When the sight alignment for the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun is correct,

the front sight blade a. is at the bottom of the rear sight aperture. b. is at the top of the rear sight aperture. c. blocks out the entire rear sight aperture. d. is centered and halfway up in the rear sight aperture.

Item 2 You are loading your M2HB .50-caliber machinegun to fire in the automatic

firing mode. You have cleared the gun, closed the bolt, and closed the feed cover. Which step will you perform next? a. Cock the gun. b. Press the trigger. c. Press down on the bolt latch release and rotate the bolt latch release lock

until the bolt latch release is locked in the down position. d. Insert the belt of ammunition into the feedway.

Item 3 Which one of the following is a firing position for the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun? a. Bent leg prone b. Folded leg sitting (legs folded) c. Kneeling d. Supported standing

Continued on next page

Page 286: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-65 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 You have been on the range firing your .50-caliber machinegun and you

notice that it is not functioning freely and is operating sluggishly. What corrective action should you take? a. Change the belt of ammunition. b. Inspect the chamber and the T slot for an obstruction. c. Keep the machinegun laid on target and twist the ammunition belt. d. Clean and lubricate your machinegun, and then reset headspace and

timing.

Items 5 Through 9

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the identification of the failure in column 2 that best describes the failure item in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used more than once.

Column 1 Failure Item

Column 2 Failure Identification

___ 5. Failure to function freely ___ 6. Failure to fire ___ 7. Failure to feed ___ 8. Uncontrollable automatic fire ___ 9. Failure to chamber

a. Malfunction b. Stoppage

Item 10 What is the first thing the gunner must do while performing immediate

action? a. Clear the gun and inspect to determine the cause of the stoppage. b. Attempt to fire again. c. Re-lay on target. d. Wait 5 seconds to see if the round will “cook off.”

Page 287: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 5-66 Study Unit 5, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Answers The following table provides the answers to the items on the previous page.

If you have any questions concerning this summary check, refer back to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page

1 d 5-54 2 c 5-56 3 b 5-58 4 d 5-60 5 a 5-60 6 b 5-61 7 b 5-61 8 a 5-60 9 b 5-61 10 d 5-63

Page 288: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-1 Study Unit 6

STUDY UNIT 6

MK19 MACHINEGUN

Overview

Estimated Study Time

1 hour, 45 minutes

Unit Scope This study unit will discusses the characteristics, operation, maintenance,

immediate action, care and cleaning techniques, and firing procedures for the MK19 machinegun (MK19).

Learning Objectives

After completing this unit, you should be able to �� Identify the characteristics of the MK19. �� Identify how to maintain the MK19. �� Identify how to engage a target with the MK19. �� Identify how to troubleshoot malfunctions and stoppages on the MK19.

In This Study Unit

This study unit contains the following lessons:

Topic See Page

Lesson 1 Description 6-3 Lesson 2 Clearing, Disassembling, and Cleaning 6-13 Lesson 3 Assembling, Conducting the Function Check, and

Mounts and Accessories 6-33

Lesson 4 Sighting, Firing, Malfunctions, Stoppages, and Immediate Action

6-49

Page 289: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-2 Study Unit 6

(This page left intentionally blank.)

Page 290: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-3 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1

LESSON 1

DESCRIPTION

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

20 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the basic characteristics of the MK19 machinegun

(MK19) and the ammunition it uses.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the capabilities of the MK19. �� Identify the cycle of operation for the MK19. �� Identify the standard types of ammunition for the MK19 based on use.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 6-3 Role and Capabilities 6-4 General Characteristics 6-5 Cycle of Operation 6-7 Ammunition 6-8 Lesson 1 Exercise 6-10

Page 291: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-4 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1

Role and Capabilities

Role The MK19 provides a high volume of fire that is effective against lightly

armored vehicles, structures, and personnel.

Capabilities The capabilities of the MK19 are to

�� Support the infantry in the attack or defense �� Provide a heavy volume of destructive/suppressive fire �� Provide fires for the final protective fire (FPF) �� Provide protection for motorized movement �� Destroy lightly armored vehicles �� Perform reconnaissance by fire

Page 292: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-5 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1

General Characteristics

Appearance Below is a picture of the MK19 mounted on a tripod.

Weight The approximate weight of the MK19 is 75.6 pounds.

Length The length of the MK19 is 43.1 inches.

Range The following table lists the range (in meters) for the MK19.

Type of Range Distance in Meters Maximum 2,212 Maximum effective-area target 2,212 Maximum effective-point target 1,500 Minimum safe distance-training 310 Minimum safe distance combat 75

Rates of Fire The following table lists the rate of fire (in rounds per minute) for the MK19.

Rate Rounds per Minute Sustained 40 Rapid 60 Cyclic 325-375

Muzzle Velocity The muzzle velocity of the MK19 is 790 feet per second.

Continued on next page

Page 293: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-6 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1

General Characteristics, Continued

Three Descriptive Characteristics

The MK19 is �� Belt-fed. When the rounds of ammunition are linked together, they form

a belt. During firing, the links disengage but remain on the cartridge case. Feeding is continuous throughout the cycle.

�� Air-cooled. The MK19 is an air-cooled weapon. No special cooling

measures are required. Air circulation at normal outside air temperatures provides adequate cooling in any climate.

�� Blowback-operated. This term is used for weapons that are directly

operated by the exploding propellant charge.

Page 294: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-7 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1

Cycle of Operation

Operation The cycle of operation for the MK19 consists of steps shown in the table

below:

Step Action 1 Feeding: When the bolt moves forward it forces the pawls of the

feed slide assembly to position a new round in the feeder. As the bolt moves to the rear it forces the round from the feeder into the extractors and in position to chamber.

2 Chambering: The bolt moves forward on the rail and seats the round in the chamber.

3 Locking: Locking takes place when the bolt reaches the forward-most position by the recoil springs and held in place by spring tension and the weight of the bolt.

4 Firing: As locking occurs, the cocking lever is moved to the rear and allows the firing pin mechanism to release into the primer of the round.

5 Unlocking: As the round fires the pressure from the gas overcomes the tension of the spring, and moves the bolt to the rear.

6 Extracting: The rearward movement of the bolt along the rails pulls the casing out of the chamber.

7 Ejecting: The vertical cam forces a new round into position and ejects the spent casing out through the ejection port.

8 Cocking: Simultaneously with ejection, the cocking lever is moved forward, cocking the firing pin.

Page 295: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-8 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1

Ammunition

Types The MK19 fires 40mm ammunition. Each type is designed for a specific

situation or mission. The table below shows the name, type, and characteristics of each round.

Name Type Characteristics

M383/M384

High explosive, anti-personnel (HE)

��Point detonating ��Inflicts personnel

casualties with ground burst

��Casualty radius - 15 meters

M430

High explosive, dual purpose (HEDP)

��Standard round for MK 19

��Impact detonating ��Used against lightly

armored vehicles, fortifications and personnel

��Casualty producing radius - 15 meters

M918/M385

Practice Note: The M385 round is inert and has no blast effect in the target area.

��Solid aluminum projectile

��Simulates explosion upon impact

��Used in range gunnery practice

M922

Dummy ��Completely inert ��Used in training ��Green with gold

ogive and black markings

Continued on next page

Page 296: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-9 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1

Ammunition, Continued

Characteristics The pictures below show the internal components of the round.

Important The 40mm ammunition used with the MK19 cannot be used in the M203

grenade launcher.

Page 297: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-10 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete exercise items 1 through 3 by performing the action required.

Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 You are part of a perimeter defense with your MK19. Which of the following

is a capability that can be accomplished using the MK19? a. Destroy enemy tanks b. Provide anti-aircraft fire c. Provide fires for the FPF d. Supplement mortar fires using indirect fire

Item 2 Complete the cycle of operation of the MK19 in sequence, feeding,

chambering, locking, __________, __________, __________, __________, and cocking. a. firing, unlocking, ejecting, extracting b. firing, unlocking, extracting, ejecting c. firing, extracting, unlocking, ejecting d. firing, releasing, extracting, ejecting

Item 3 Which of the following 40mm ammunition is the practice round used with the

MK19? a. M383 b. M384 c. M385 d. M430

Continued on next page

Page 298: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-11 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 c 6-4 2 b 6-7 3 c 6-8

Page 299: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-12 Study Unit 6, Lesson 1 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 300: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-13 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

LESSON 2

CLEARING, DISASSEMBLING, AND CLEANING

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

20 minutes

Lesson Scope The objective of this lesson discusses how to clear, disassemble, and clean the

MK19 machinegun (MK19).

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the steps to clear the MK19. �� Identify the steps to disassemble the MK19. �� Identify steps for the care and cleaning of the MK19.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 6-13 Clearing 6-14 Components 6-17 Disassembling 6-18 Care and Cleaning 6-27 Lesson 2 Exercise 6-30

Page 301: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-14 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Clearing

Procedure Before you begin to disassemble any weapon, you must first clear it. The

following table lists the steps for clearing the MK19.

Step Action 1 Point the gun in a safe direction. 2 Place the fire/safe switch on the S position as shown in picture

below.

3 Open the top cover assembly as shown in picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 302: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-15 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Clearing, Continued

Procedure, continued

Step Action 4 If ammunition is loaded in the gun, reach beneath the feeder and

press the primary and secondary positioning pawls as shown in the picture below. At the same time, slide the linked rounds out of the feeder and feed tray.

5 If a round is on the face of the bolt, insert a section of the cleaning rod through either side of the receiver rail. �� Place it on top of the live round or cartridge case as close to the

bolt face as possible. �� Push down to force the round out through the bottom.

6 Lower and pull the charger handles to the rear as shown below.

Continued on next page

Page 303: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-16 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Clearing, Continued

Procedure, continued

Step Action 7 Inspect the chamber and bolt face again to ensure that no live

rounds are in the weapon. 8 Place the safety switch on Fire (F).

9 Press the trigger and ease the bolt forward. Return the charger handles to their original position.

Page 304: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-17 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Components

Components After you clear the MK19, you are ready to disassemble it. The MK19

machinegun can be disassembled into the major components as shown in the illustration below.

Page 305: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-18 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Disassembling

Procedure After you have cleared your MK19, you are ready to disassemble the

machinegun by removing the following: �� Secondary drive lever �� Top cover assembly �� Feed slide assembly and feed tray �� Bolt and backplate assembly �� Primary drive lever and vertical cam assembly �� Sear assembly �� Alignment guide assembly and ogive plunger �� Round positioning block and charger assemblies

Removing the Secondary Drive Lever

The secondary drive lever can be removed by following the steps in the table below.

Step Action

1 Raise the cover and push down on the pivot post from the outside of the cover assembly as shown in the picture below.

2 Separate the secondary drive lever from the top cover assembly. 3 Remove the secondary drive lever from slide assembly.

Continued on next page

Page 306: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-19 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Removing the Top Cover Assembly

The top cover assembly can be removed by following the steps in the table below.

Step Action

1 Hold the top cover straight up with one hand and pull the top cover pins from both sides as shown below.

2 Pull the top cover pins from both sides of the cover assembly as shown above.

3 Lift the top cover assembly straight up and off.

Continued on next page

Page 307: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-20 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Removing the Feed Slide Assembly and Feed Tray

The feed slide assembly and feed tray can be removed by following the steps in the table below.

Step Action

1 Align the tabs on the feed slide assembly with the slots in the feed tray and lift them straight up as shown below.

2 Lift the feed tray straight up as shown below.

Continued on next page

Page 308: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-21 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Removing the Bolt and Backplate Assembly

The bolt and backplate assembly can be removed by following the steps in the table below.

Step Action

1 Take out the backplate pin using the rim of a spent cartridge case or metal link as shown below.

Note: Ensure that the safety switch is in the fire position. 2 Grasp the control grips with both hands and lift up slightly to

disengage the backplate from the locking lugs in the receiver. 3 Pull the bolt and backplate assembly to the rear as shown below.

Continued on next page

Page 309: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-22 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Removing the Primary Drive Lever and the Vertical Cam Assembly

The primary drive lever and vertical cam can be removed by following the steps in the table below.

Step Action 1 Reach under the top of the receiver to locate the drive lever lock

on the vertical cam assembly. Slide the lock to the rear about 1/4 inch as shown in the picture below.

2 Press down on the primary drive lever pivot post. (This releases the primary drive lever and the vertical cam assembly)

3 Pull the primary drive lever and the vertical cam assembly out of the receiver.

Continued on next page

Page 310: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-23 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Removing the Sear Assembly

The sear assembly can be removed by following the steps in the table below.

Step Action

1 Turn the receiver on its side or upside down. 2 Lift the lock pin with a cartridge link or with your hand as shown

in the picture below.

3 Press the receiver sear (underneath the safety), and rotate the sear housing assembly 90 degrees in either direction.

4 Place the safety switch in the safe position. 5 Keep pressure on the sear and lift the sear assembly off the

weapon.

Note: If the fire/safe switch is on the fire (F) position when you remove the sear housing assembly, parts from the sear housing assembly can fall out and become lost.

Continued on next page

Page 311: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-24 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Removing the Alignment Guide Assembly and the Ogive Plunger

The alignment guide assembly and ogive plunger can be removed by following the steps in the table below:

Step Action

1 Depress the alignment guide spring by inserting a cartridge link or small tool into the slot in the feeder mouth.

2 Slide the alignment guide towards the feeder mouth, pulling the assembly slightly rearward.

3 Pull the ogive plunger assembly out through the inside wall of the receiver as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 312: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-25 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Removing Round Positioning Block and Charger Assemblies

The table below lists the steps to remove the round positioning block and the charger assemblies.

Step Action

1 Depress the round positioning block and slide it towards the muzzle end of the gun as shown in the picture below.

2 Pull the round positioning block away from the wall of the receiver.

Continued on next page

Page 313: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-26 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Disassembling, Continued

Removing Round Positioning Block and Charger Assemblies, continued

Step Action 3 Place the charger assemblies in the upright position. 4 Using a metal link or spent cartridge case, retract the locking

plunger at the base of the charging arm.

5 Slide the charger housing rearward to disengage the lugs from the key slots in the receiver as shown above.

6 Lift the charger assembly away from the receiver.

Continued on next page

Page 314: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-27 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Care and Cleaning

When to Clean Care and cleaning consists of three actions: cleaning, inspecting, and

lubricating. You need to conduct care and cleaning on a regular basis. �� After firing. �� At least daily under combat/field conditions. �� Weekly when the gun is in storage. �� Three consecutive days upon returning from the field.

Cleaning and Lubricating Materials

The table below describes the five types of cleaning and lubricating materials that you can use on the MK19.

Cleaner/Lubricant Use

Lubricant, weapons, semi-fluid (LSAT)

Lubricates the weapon.

Note: This is the preferred material for lubricating the MK19.

Cleaner, lubricant, preservative (CLP)

Cleans, lubricates, and preserves the weapon.

Note: CLP is used as a lubricant only if LSAT is not available.

Lubricant, arctic weather (LAW) Lubricates the weapon in extremely cold weather (below 0o Fahrenheit).

Rifle bore cleaner (RBC) Cleans the bore and the chamber. Dry cleaning solvent (P-D-680) Cleans the weapon.

Continued on next page

Page 315: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-28 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Care and Cleaning, Continued

Cleaning The table below lists the steps to clean the MK19.

Step Action 1 Disassemble the weapon into its components. 2 Inspect all parts for cracks, burrs, wear, and rust. 3 Clean the bore and chamber with RBC or CLP. 4 Immerse the parts in drycleaning solvent or apply drycleaning

solvent to a rag or brush and scrub the parts.

CAUTION: Do not immerse the sear housing assembly, backplate, ogive plunger and the bolt assembly in solvent. Solvent can dilute the lubricant and grease in these parts.

5 Lubricate and then reassemble the weapon.

Inspecting Inspections are usually conducted in conjunction with cleaning. The table

below lists the steps to inspect the MK19.

Step Action 1 Disassemble the weapon into its components. 2 Inspect the barrel for carbon buildup in the bore or chamber. 3 Inspect all parts for cracks, wear, burrs, and rust. 4 Inspect all pins to be sure they are not loose or missing. 5 Inspect all springs for weak spring action. 6 Inspect all moving parts for binding. 7 Reassemble the weapon. 8 Inspect the mount, spare parts, and tools.

Continued on next page

Page 316: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-29 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2

Care and Cleaning, Continued

Lubricating The MK19 must be lubricated to reduce wear and to prevent rust and

malfunctions. The table below lists the steps to lubricate the MK19.

Step Action 1 Apply a light coat of lubricant to all parts. The table below lists

the authorized lubricates for use. 2 Apply several drops of lubricant to moving parts (feeder pawls,

pivot posts and latch mechanism) and work the parts to spread the lubricant.

Extreme Environments

In extreme environments, you must take extra precautions to be sure your MK19 operates trouble-free. The following table shows the precautions you must take for each environmental condition.

Environment Precautions

Hot, humid climate ��Inspect the weapon frequently for rust.

��Keep the weapon as moisture-free as possible.

��Field-strip, clean, and lubricate the weapon more often.

��Use a generous coat of lubricant. Hot, dry, and sandy climate ��Clean and lubricate daily.

��Wipe the weapon dry. Do not use extra lubricant because the grit and dust will stick to the parts.

��Cover the weapon when not in use. Cold climates ��Cover the weapon when outside.

��Keep the weapon free of excess lubrication and moisture.

��If the metal sweats, dry and lubricate the parts before taking the weapon outdoors again.

Page 317: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-30 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete exercise items 1 through 4 by performing the action required.

Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Which of the following is the first step in the procedure for clearing the

MK19? a. Open the top cover assembly. b. Place the fire/safe switch on the S position. c. Inspect the chamber for ammunition. d. Point the gun in a safe direction.

Item 2 The first item you remove to begin disassembling the MK19 is the

a. top cover and feed tray. b. sear assembly. c. secondary drive lever. d. bolt and backplate assembly.

Item 3 What is the preferred lubricant for the MK19 machinegun?

a. LSAT b. CLP c. LAW d. RBC

Item 4 How often do you conduct care and cleaning of the MK19 when it is in

storage? a. Daily b. Weekly c. Bi-weekly d. Monthly

Continued on next page

Page 318: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-31 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 d 6-14 2 c 6-18 3 a 6-27 4 b 6-27

Page 319: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-32 Study Unit 6, Lesson 2 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 320: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-33 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

LESSON 3

ASSEMBLING, CONDUCTING THE FUNCTION CHECK, AND MOUNTS AND ACCESSORIES

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

20 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson discuses how to assemble, perform a function check, and mount

the MK19 machinegun (MK19).

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the steps to assemble the MK19. �� Identify the steps to perform a function check on the MK19. �� Identify the mounts and accessories for the MK19.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 6-33 Assembling 6-34 Performing a Function Check 6-43 Mounts and Accessories 6-44 Lesson 3 Exercise 6-47

Page 321: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-34 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Assembling

Procedure After you have cleaned and inspected your MK19, you are ready to begin

assembly. To assemble the MK19, replace the parts in the reverse order of disassembly by attaching the

�� Charger and round positioning block assemblies �� Ogive plunger and the alignment guide assembly �� Sear assembly �� Vertical cam assembly and the primary drive lever �� Bolt and backplate assembly �� Feed tray and the feed slide assembly �� Top cover assembly �� Secondary drive lever

Continued on next page

Page 322: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-35 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Attaching the Charger and Round Positioning Block Assemblies

The table below lists the steps to attach the charger and round positioning block assemblies to the MK19.

Step Action

1 Rotate the charger handle to the up position. 2 Line up the lugs on the charger with the slots in the receiver rail.

3 Insert the charger lugs into the slots. 4 Hold the charger tightly against the rail. 5 Slide the charger forward until it locks in place.

6 Insert the round positioning block into the slots in the receiver. 7 Push against the block and slide it toward the rear until it locks in

place.

Continued on next page

Page 323: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-36 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Attaching the Ogive Plunger and Alignment Guide Assembly

The table below lists the steps to attach the ogive plunger and the alignment guide assembly to the MK19 machinegun.

Step Action 1 Insert the ogive plunger into the feeder wall.

2 Position the alignment guide assembly so that the pin is lined up with the slot in the feeder wall.

3 Depress the leaf spring. 4 Slide the alignment guide toward the ogive plunger until you hear

a click.

Continued on next page

Page 324: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-37 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Attaching the Sear Assembly

The table below lists the steps to attach the sear assembly

Step Action 1 Turn the receiver upside down. 2 Place the sear on the receiver and squeeze the sear lock and rotate the

assembly 90 degrees to the right or left until it locks in place.

Continued on next page

Page 325: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-38 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Attaching the Vertical Cam Assembly and the Primary Drive Lever

Attaching the Charger and Round Positioning Block Assemblies. The table below lists the steps to attach the charger and round positioning block assemblies to the MK19.

Step Action

1 Slide the vertical cam assembly through the rear of the receiver. The raised portion slides over the hole in the receiver. The drive lever lock is underneath.

2 Engage the forked end in the notch in the receiver. 3 Hold the vertical cam assembly in place while you slide the

primary drive lever into the receiver. 4 Engage the pivot post of the lever through the holes in the receiver

and the vertical cam. 5 Slide the drive lever lock on the vertical cam forward.

Continued on next page

Page 326: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-39 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Attaching the Bolt and Backplate Assembly

The table below lists the steps to attach the bolt and backplate assembly to the MK19.

Step Action

1 Note: Be sure the cocking lever is cocked and forward.

Place the fire/safe switch in the F position. 2 Insert the bolt and backplate assembly into the receiver.

3 When the bolt and backplate assembly stops, press the receiver sear and slide the bolt and backplate assembly all the way forward. WARNING: Watch your thumbs!

4 Insert the backplate pin to lock the assembly in place.

Continued on next page

Page 327: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-40 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Attaching the Feed Tray and the Feed Slide Assembly

The table below lists the steps to attach the feed tray and the feed slide assembly to the MK19.

Step Action

1 Drop the feed tray into the top of the feeder, recessed side up. The pinholes on the tray line up with the lugs on the receiver.

2 Position the feed slide assembly so that the tabs are lined up with the slots in the tray. Insert the tabs into the slots.

3 Slide the feed slide assembly to the right side of the feed tray. 4 Line up the pinholes in the feed tray and in the top cover, and the

receiver lugs. 5 Hold the top cover straight up. Insert the top cover pins on both

sides. Be sure the crosspin enters the receiver.

Continued on next page

Page 328: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-41 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

Attaching the Top Cover Assembly

Hold the top cover straight up with one hand and install the top cover pins from both sides as shown in diagram below.

Attaching the Secondary Drive Lever

The table below lists the steps to attach the secondary drive lever to the MK19.

Step Action

1 Lift the feed slide assembly and tray. 2 Engage the forked end of the secondary drive lever with the feed

slide pin.

3 Press the raised pivot post through the hole in the top cover. 4 Press the tray firmly against the top cover.

WARNING: If the secondary drive lever is not properly

engaged with the feed slide pin, the gun will not fire and can be dangerous.

Continued on next page

Page 329: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-42 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Assembling, Continued

After-Assembly Check

After assembling the MK19, conduct a check to ensure proper assembly. The table below lists the steps to conduct an after-assembly check.

Step Action

1 Be sure the secondary drive lever is properly engaged with the feed slide pin.

2 Be sure the feed slide assembly is all the way to the left. 3 Be sure the bolt is forward and the charger handles are up. 4 Close the top cover. 5 Be sure the top cover pins are flush.

Page 330: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-43 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Performing a Function Check

Purpose You should conduct a function check immediately after assembly and before

preparing to fire. Before conducting a function check, be sure the �� Secondary drive lever is properly engaged with the feed slide pin. �� Feed slide assembly is all the way to the left. �� Bolt is forward.

Procedure The table below lists the steps to perform a function check.

Step Action 1 Charge the gun. If the bolt jams midway

�� Hold the bolt back while opening the top cover. �� Slowly ride the bolt forward. �� Close the top cover and charge again.

2 Place the fire/safe switch on S and depress the trigger. (Nothing should happen.)

3 Place the fire/safe switch on F and depress the trigger. (You should hear a click.)

4 Open the top cover assembly and be sure the firing pin is forward. If it is not �� Remove the bolt and backplate assembly. �� Be sure the cocking lever is forward. �� Replace the bolt and backplate assembly.

Page 331: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-44 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Mounts and Accessories

Mounts The following mounts are used with the MK19

�� M3 tripod mount �� Vehicle mount

Accessories The MK19 must be mounted to fire. Along with one of the mounts listed

above, you need the accessories listed in the blocks below. These include the MK 64 cradle, a traversing and elevating mechanism, and a pintle. To aid in night firing, you may need to use a night vision sight. There is also a feed throat that can be attached to guide ammunition into the feeder.

MK64 Cradle The MK64 gun cradle, shown in the picture below, is used to support the

MK19. The cradle permits mounting on the M3 tripod and vehicle mounts. The T&E mechanism is attached to the cradle to permit accurate delivery of fire.

Procedures to Mount the MK64 Cradle

To mount the MK19 on the gun cradle �� Remove the retaining pin. �� Place the gun in the cradle. �� Reinsert the retaining pins.

T&E Mechanism

The MK19 uses the same mounts (M3 tripod, M4 pedestal, M66 ring, HMMWV weapons station) and the same T&E mechanism as the M2HB .50-caliber heavy machinegun.

Continued on next page

Page 332: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-45 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Mounts and Accessories, Continued

Pintle Adapter The pintle adapter is needed to mount the MK19 to the mounting well of a

HMMWV weapons platform and M3A2 ring mount with the M66 ring. A picture of the adapter is shown below:

Continued on next page

Page 333: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-46 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3

Mounts and Accessories, Continued

AN/TVS-5 Night Vision Sight

Night vision sight can be installed on the MK19 for passive night observation and fire. Portable and battery operated, the AN/TVS-5 amplifies natural light such as moonlight, starlight, and skyglow. AN/TVS-5 does not emit visible or infrared light that could be detected by the enemy.

Feed Throat The MK19 has a feed throat that can be attached to the weapon to guide the

ammunition belt into the feeder. The table below lists the steps to attach the feed throat to the MK19 machinegun.

Step Action

1 Squeeze the spring-loaded pins on the feed throat as shown in the picture below.

2 Insert the feed throat into the slots on both sides of the feeder.

Page 334: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-47 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete exercise items 1 through 3 by performing the action required.

Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 What is the next step in assembling the MK19 after attaching the top cover

assembly? a. Attach the secondary drive lever b. Attach the feed tray and the top cover assembly c. Attach the sear assembly d. Attach the ogive plunger and the alignment guide assembly

Item 2 While performing a function check on the MK19, the operator depresses the

trigger with the fire/safe switch in the F position. What should happen? a. Nothing. b. A click should be heard. c. The bolt should slam forward. d. A round should eject.

Item 3 Which of the following night vision sights can be installed on the MK19 to

aid in night observation and fire? a. AN/PVS-4 night vision sight b. AN/PVS-5 night vision goggle c. AN/TVS-4 night vision sight d. AN/TVS-5 night vision sight

Continued on next page

Page 335: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-48 Study Unit 6, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer` Reference Page 1 a 6-41 2 b 6-43 3 d 6-46

Page 336: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-49 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4

LESSON 4

SIGHTING, FIRING, MALFUNCTIONS, STOPPAGES, AND IMMEDIATE ACTION

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses how to set the sights, fire, handle malfunctions and

stoppages, and apply immediate action for the MK19 machinegun (MK19).

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the parts of the sights on the MK19. �� Identify the steps to prepare the MK19 to engage a target. �� Identify the malfunctions on the MK19. �� Identify stoppages on the MK19. �� Identify the steps for applying immediate action to reduce a stoppage on

the MK19.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topic:

Topic See Page Introduction 6-49 Sights 6-50 Before Firing 6-52 Firing 6-55 Malfunctions 6-56 Stoppages 6-57 Immediate Action 6-58 Lesson 4 Exercise 6-59

Page 337: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-50 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4

Sights

Introduction The MK40 sight, is the rear sight assembly on the MK19. The sight is a

ladder type design with graduated range indications from 300-1,500 meters. The strengthening rib on the gun’s top cover is used as the front sight blade.

Front Sight The front sight is a raised ridge on the top cover assembly, as shown in the

illustrated below:

Continued on next page

Page 338: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-51 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4

Sights, Continued

MK40 Parts The illustration below lists the parts of the sight assembly for the MK19.

Function The table below lists the function of the parts located on the front sight

assembly.

Part Function Plunger Releases the sight frame Retainer lock nut Locks the aperture carrier in place Sight frame Contains the graduated range indications Elevation wheel Adjusts the degrees of elevation Aperture carrier Sets the elevation Windage screw Adjusts the windage Battlesight Sight used with sight assembly folded down to engage

targets with in battlesight range.

Page 339: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-52 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4

Before Firing

Prepare Sights When the rear sight frame is down, use the battlesight to engage snap targets.

The table below lists the steps to sight in on a target with the rear sight frame up.

Step Action

1 Estimate the range to the target. 2 Push in on the lock nut and move the aperture carrier up or down

to the range indication that corresponds to your estimated range. 3 Adjust the T&E mechanism to obtain a sight picture on the target.

Prepare Weapon

To engage targets with the MK19, you must �� Feed the ammunition into the weapon �� Charge the weapon �� Load the first round �� Aim and fire

Continued on next page

Page 340: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-53 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4

Before Firing, Continued

Feeding the Ammunition

The following table lists the steps to feed ammunition into the MK19.

Step Action 1 Clear the MK19. 2 Insert the first round, female link first, into the feeder as shown in

the picture below.

3 Push the round across the first pawl as shown in the picture below until you hear a click.

4 Move the secondary drive lever (inside the top cover) to the left.

5 Close the top cover.

Continued on next page

Page 341: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-54 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4

Before Firing, Continued

Charging After feeding, charging the gun manually moves the round into position to be

fired. The table below lists the steps to charge the MK19.

Step Action 1 Grasp the charger handles (1). 2 Press the charger handle locks (2), as shown in the picture below,

and rotate the handles down.

3 Pull the chargers to the rear. 4 Return the charger handles forward and rotate them up to the

locked position. CAUTION: Be sure the top cover is closed before charging.

Loading the First Round

The table below lists the steps to load the first round onto the face of the bolt.

Step Action

1 Place the fire/safe switch on the F position. 2 Press the trigger, allowing the bolt to slam forward. 3 Charge the gun again. 4 Return the fire/safe switch to the S position. The gun is now

loaded, charged, and ready to fire.

Page 342: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-55 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4

Firing

Firing The table below lists the steps to fire the MK19.

Step Action 1 Place the fire/safe switch on the F position. (Be sure the charger

handles are forward and up.) 2 Place your hands on the control grips with your thumbs on the

trigger. 3 Press the trigger to fire. (Fire in three- to five-round bursts.)

Zeroing The table below lists the steps to zero the MK19.

Step Action 1 Locate a target at a known distance. (Recommended distance is

400 - 600 meters) 2 Adjust the rear sight setting to the range to the target. 3 Center the windage scale by turning the windage screw until the

center index lines are aligned. 4 Adjust the T&E mechanism until the correct sight picture is

obtained at the base of the target. 5 Fire a single round and observe the impact. If the round

�� Impacts within five meters of the target, fire another round to

confirm zero. If this round impacts within five meters of the target, your MK19 is zeroed.

�� Is not within five meters of the target, go to step 6.

6 Adjust the windage screw and elevation wheel on the sight to obtain a sight picture on the impact.

Note: Do not move the gun. Move the sight. 7 Adjust the T&E mechanism to regain the correct sight picture on

the target. 8 Go back to step 5.

Note: Repeat steps 5-8 until your MK19 is zeroed.

Page 343: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-56 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4

Malfunctions

Introduction Malfunctions and stoppages can occur any time you are firing the MK19.

You must be able to identify and correct the problem quickly and continue your mission.

Malfunction Defined

A malfunction is a failure of the weapon to function properly not due to defective ammunition or operational error by the gunner.

Common Malfunctions

The table below lists the most common types of malfunctions, their causes, and the corrective action to take.

Malfunction Cause Corrective Action

Sluggish Action �� Friction from dirt �� Carbon buildup �� Lack of

lubrication �� Burred parts

�� Clean �� Lubricate �� Tighten or replace parts

Runaway Gun �� Worn parts �� Short recoil of the

bolt assembly

�� Keep rounds on target, until all rounds on the belt have been fired.

�� Presses the charger handle locks and lower one charger handle.

Note: Do not try to break the

ammunition belt.

Page 344: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-57 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4

Stoppages

Stoppages A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of operation caused by faulty

action of the gun or defective ammunition.

Common Stoppages

The table below lists the most common types of stoppages, their causes, and the corrective action to take.

Stoppage Cause Corrective action

Failure to feed �� Rounds not lined up �� Male end of link is first�� Broken links

�� Align the rounds. �� Replace the rounds. Place

the female link first. �� Replace with new linked

rounds. Failure to fire �� Defective ammunition

�� Defective parts in the firing mechanism

�� Replace with new ammunition.

�� Inspect the parts and replace worn, burred, or broken parts.

Page 345: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-58 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4

Immediate Action

Definition Immediate action is the action taken to reduce a stoppage without

investigating the cause.

Procedure The table below lists the steps to perform immediate action.

Step Training Action Combat Action

1 Shout “Misfire.” Press charger handle locks and rotate charger handles down.

2 Clear the area of nonessential personnel.

Pull and lock the bolt to the rear.

3 Wait 10 seconds for possible hangfire.

Push the charger handles forward and lock them in the up position.

4 Pull the bolt to rear and observe for feeding and ejecting. Note: Catch round as it ejects.

Relay gun on target and attempt to fire.

5 Push charger handles forward and up.

(Same)

6 Observe for feeding and ejecting.

Takes Place Does Not �� Go to step 7 ��Unload and

clear ��Troubleshoot

(Same)

7 Attempt to fire. Note: If the weapon does not fire,

wait 10 seconds, clear, and troubleshoot.

(Same)

Page 346: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-59 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete exercise items 1 through 5 by performing the action required.

Check your answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Which of the parts below contain the graduated sight indications scale on the

MK40 sight? a. Sight frame b. Elevation wheel c. Aperture carrier d. Elevation screw

Item 2 What is the first step to preparing the MK19 for firing?

a. Loading the first round onto the face of the bolt b. Charging c. Function check d. Feeding

Item 3 Which of the following is the corrective action if you have a runaway gun

with the MK19? a. Break the belt. b. Let it fire until the ammunition is expended. c. Open the top cover. d. Place the fire/safe switch in the S position.

Item 4 Which of the following is a cause of a failure to fire on a MK19?

a. Defective parts in the firing mechanism b. Rounds not lined up straight c. Male end of link is first d. Broken links

Continued on next page

Page 347: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-60 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Item 5 After observing feeding and ejecting while performing immediate action on

the MK19, a round is ejected. What is the next step the gunner performs? a. Wait 10 seconds and clear machinegun. b. Unload and clear machinegun. c. Attempt to fire machinegun. d. Troubleshoot the machinegun.

Continued on next page

Page 348: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-61 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 a 6-51 2 d 6-52 3 b 6-56 4 a 6-57 5 c 6-58

Page 349: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 6-62 Study Unit 6, Lesson 4 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 350: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-1 Study Unit 7

STUDY UNIT 7

TRAVERSING AND ELEVATING MECHANISM

Overview

Estimated Study Time

45 minutes

Scope This study unit covers the traversing and elevating (T&E) mechanism and its

use and operation.

Learning Objectives

After completing this study unit, you should be able to �� Identify the characteristics of the T&E mechanism. �� Identify the procedures for operating T&E mechanism.

In This Study Unit

This study unit contains the following lessons:

Topic See Page

Lesson 1 Characteristics 7-3 Lesson 2 Operation 7-9

Page 351: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-2 Study Unit 7

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 352: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-3 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1

LESSON 1

CHARACTERISTICS

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

15 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson will describe the use and components of the T&E mechanism.

Note: The information in this lesson applies to using the T&E mechanism

on all the machineguns discussed in this course.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Describe the purpose of the T&E mechanism. �� Identify the parts of the T&E mechanism by function.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 7-3 Function 7-4 Components 7-5 Lesson 1 Exercise 7-6

Page 353: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-4 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1

Function

Capabilities When properly employed, the traversing and elevating (T&E) mechanism

enables you to �� Lock the gun into a desired position which allows you to accurately

engage predetermined targets during periods of reduced visibility �� Obtain direction and elevation readings from the traversing bar and T&E

mechanism and record the readings on your range card. This allows you to

�� Fire from defilade positions. �� Engage enemy positions on reverse slopes. �� Quickly and accurately shift to predetermined targets.

Page 354: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-5 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1

Components

Parts List The T&E mechanism consists of

�� Two elevating screws

�� Lower �� Upper

�� Upper elevating screw yoke �� Traversing slide lock lever �� Traversing mechanism scale �� Two handwheels

Traversing (adjusts direction left and right) Elevating (adjusts height up and down)

Note: All readings are recorded in mils (unit of measurement)

Page 355: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-6 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 3. Check your answers against those listed at the

end of this lesson.

Item 1 Which of the following actions does the T&E mechanism enable you to

accomplish? a. Engage armored targets at oblique angles b. Fire from defilade positions c. Fire on the move d. Fire from unsupported positions

Item 2 The T&E allows the gunner to

a. record the readings on a range card for later use. b. support the squad in the offense. c. engage enemy positions on the move. d. freely engage targets.

Item 3 What part on the T&E locks itself to the traversing bar?

a. Elevating and traversing handwheels b. Upper elevating screw yoke and traversing bar c. Traversing slide lock lever d. Upper and lower elevating screws

Continued on next page

Page 356: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-7 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 b 7-4 2 a 7-4 3 c 7-5

Page 357: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-8 Study Unit 7, Lesson 1 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 358: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-9 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2

LESSON 2

OPERATION

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

20 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson describes the operation of the T&E mechanism.

Note: The information in this lesson applies to using the T&E mechanism on

all the machineguns discussed in this course.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the procedure for initially positioning the traversing mechanism. �� Identify where you lock the traversing bar to lay the machinegun for

direction. �� Identify the procedure for obtaining a direction reading from the T&E. �� Identify the procedure for obtaining elevation reading from the T&E.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 7-9 Initial Positioning of the T&E Mechanism 7-10 Laying the Machinegun for Direction 7-11 Direction Readings 7-12 Elevation Readings 7-14 Lesson 2 Exercise 7-16

Page 359: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-10 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2

Initial Positioning of the T&E Mechanism

Center the Traversing Mechanism

You must center the traversing mechanism before obtaining direction and elevation readings. The following table lists the steps for centering the traversing mechanism.

Step Action

1 Turn the traversing handwheel (shown below) toward your body as far as it will go.

2 Turn it two complete revolutions (50 clicks) away from you. 3 Check the handwheel to ensure the zero on the scale is lined up

with the zero index line.

Page 360: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-11 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2

Laying the Machinegun for Direction

Two Methods After centering the traversing mechanism, you can lay the gun for direction.

The two methods of laying the gun for direction depend on if a final protective line (FPL) has been assigned or has not been assigned.

Final Protective Line (FPL) Assigned

The following table lists the steps for laying the gun for direction if a final protective line has been assigned.

Step Action

1 Lock the traversing slide all the way to the end of the traversing bar opposite to the direction of the FPL.

2 Lift the rear legs of the tripod and shift the tripod until the muzzle of the gun points along the FPL.

No Final Protective Line (FPL) Assigned

If an FPL has not been assigned, lay the gun on the center of your sector of fire. The following table lists the steps for laying the gun for direction if an FPL has not been assigned.

Step Action

1 Lock the left edge of the traversing slide on the 0 graduation on the traversing bar. Note: The left edge of the traversing slide is always used as an

index mark. 2 Lift the rear legs of the tripod and shift the tripod until the muzzle

of the gun is pointed to the center of your sector of fire.

Emplace Tripod

After laying the gun, firmly emplace the tripod by �� Digging in the shoes �� Placing sandbags on the tripod legs Note: If the tripod legs are moved, you must obtain new readings.

Page 361: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-12 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2

Direction Readings

When to Obtain Readings

Obtain direction readings for all targets within your sector of fire except for the FPL. Note: The FPL needs no direction reading since the traversing slide is

positioned all the way to the left or right of the traversing bar to fire.

Procedure The following table lists the steps to obtain direction readings to targets.

Step Action 1 Loosen the traversing slide lock lever. Slide the traversing slide

along the traversing bar until the gun is laid on the center of a point target or on either flank of a linear target.

2 Lock the traversing bar and read the direction reading from the scale on the traversing bar as shown in the figure below.

3 If the left edge of the traversing slide

�� Falls exactly on a 5 mil graduation (tickmark), that is your

direction reading. �� Does not fall exactly on a graduation, go to step 4.

Continued on next page

Page 362: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-13 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2

Direction Readings, Continued

Procedure, continued

Step Action

4 Move the left edge of the traversing bar slide back to the next smaller graduation.

5 Use the traversing handwheel to complete the initial lay and record the reading.

6 Add the mil readings obtained from steps 4 and 5.

Example The gunner centers the gun on a point target and finds the left edge of the

traversing bar slide falls between the 300 and 305 graduations on the traversing bar. The gunner next �� Moves the left edge of the traversing bar slide back to the LEFT 300

graduations. �� Turns the traversing handwheel to return the muzzle of the gun to the

center of the target (left 3 clicks). �� Adds the readings together. 300 + 3, you obtain a reading of 303 mils. Note: Since the gunner moved the muzzle of the gun to the right of center,

this is a right reading. The direction reading is right 303 mils.

Page 363: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-14 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2

Elevation Readings

Introduction After obtaining a direction reading, the next step is to obtain an elevation

reading. This reading is obtained from two scales.

Elevation Scales

The two scales used to obtain an elevation reading on the T&E are taken from the �� Engraved scale on the upper elevating screw plate. It is graduated in 50-

mil increments from –200 mils to +200 mils. The index line below each number PLUS or MINUS sign above each number.

�� Engraved scale on the top of the elevating handwheel. It is graduated in

1-mil increments for a total of 50 mils.

Continued on next page

Page 364: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-15 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2

Direction Readings, Continued

Method For Obtaining Elevation Reading

The following table lists the steps to obtain the elevation reading.

Step Action

1 Estimate the range to the target and place the range on the sight. 2 Lay the gun on the center base of the target. 3 Lower your head until your eyes are on line with the top of the

elevating handwheel. 4 The first part of the reading is the number and the plus (+) or (-)

minus sign above the first visible index line. 5 Locate the graduation on line with the indicator this is the second

part of the number.

Example To place the elevation reading on the T&E, follow the steps in the table

below.

Step Action 1 Manipulate the elevating handwheel until the horizontal line is

below the number needed at eye level. 2 Turn the handwheel until the indicator shows the proper number.

An example reading is written as –50/3.

Note: An elevation reading is valid only on the T&E mechanism on which

the reading was originally obtained.

Page 365: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-16 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 E xercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 4. Check your answers against those listed at the

end of this lesson.

Item 1 Which of the following are the first two steps of the procedure for initially

positioning the traversing mechanism? a. Slide the traversing slide so that the left edge is lined up with the index

line. b. Turn the traversing handwheel toward your body until the zero on the

scale is lined up with the zero index line. c. Turn the traversing handwheel toward your body as far as it will go then

turn it two complete revolutions away from you. d. Turn the traversing handwheel until the muzzle of your gun is centered in

your primary sector of fire.

Item 2 You are laying your gun in a defensive position. Your platoon commander

assigns you a final protective line (FPL) to your right, across the front of the platoon battle position. When laying your gun, where do you lock the traversing slide? a. Lock the left edge on the zero graduation on the traversing bar. b. Lock the slide on the graduation that indicates the direction of the FPL. c. Leave the traversing slide unlocked. d. Lock the traversing slide all the way to the left on the traversing bar.

Continued on next page

Page 366: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-17 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 E xercise, Continued

Item 3 You are obtaining a direction reading. You have laid the gun on the center of

the target and locked the traversing slide. You look down on the traversing bar scale and see that the left edge of the traversing slide is between the 230 and 235 graduation. Which of the following is your next step? a. Move the left edge of the traversing slide to the 230 graduation. b. Move the left edge of the traversing slide to the 235 graduation. c. Turn the traversing handwheel until the muzzle of your gun is centered. d. Add the mil readings to obtain your direction reading.

Item 4 Which of the following is a step for obtaining an elevation reading?

a. Align the elevating handwheel with the zero index line. b. Lay the gun on the center base of the target. c. Unlock the traverse slide mechanism. d. Place sandbags on the tripod legs.

Continued on next page

Page 367: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 7-18 Study Unit 7, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 c 7-10 2 d 7-11 3 a 7-13 4 b 7-15

Page 368: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-1 Study Unit 8

STUDY UNIT 8

THE M136, 84MM HEAT LAUNCHER AND HIGH EXPLOSIVE ANTI-TANK CARTRIDGE (AT-4)

Overview

Estimated Study Time

2 hours, 40 minutes

Unit Scope In this study unit, you will cover the characteristics, components,

employment, and capabilities of the M136, 84mm HEAT launcher and the AT-4 anti-tank cartridge.

Learning Objectives

After completing this unit, you should be able to �� Identify the main characteristics of the AT-4. �� Identify the procedures for maintaining the AT-4. �� Identify the techniques for using the AT-4.

In This Unit This study unit contains the following lessons:

Topic See Page Lesson 1 Description 8-5 Lesson 2 Operating Procedures 8-19 Lesson 3 Marksmanship Fundamentals 8-31 Lesson 4 Techniques of Fire and Range Determination 8-47 Lesson 5 Capabilities and Limitations 8-57

Page 369: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-2 Study Unit 8

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 370: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-3 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

LESSON 1

DESCRIPTION

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the mission and basic characteristics of the M136,

84mm high explosive anti-tank launcher (AT-4).

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the mission of the AT-4. �� Identify the capabilities of the AT-4. �� Identify the descriptive characteristics of the AT-4. �� Identify three safety devices that must be disengaged before firing. �� Identify the components of the AT-4 sights. �� Identify proper packaging for the AT-4. �� Identify markings for AT-4 packaging.

Continued on next page

Page 371: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-4 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

Introduction, Continued

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 8-3 General Characteristics 8-5 Components 8-7 Firing Mechanism 8-9 Sights 8-12 Packing 8-14 Marking 8-15 Lesson 1 Exercise 8-16

Page 372: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-5 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

General Characteristics

Mission The AT-4, as shown below, is used primarily against armored personnel

carriers; however, it can also be used against �� Battle tanks when it is fired at the side or the rear �� Bunkers �� Field fortifications

Capabilities The following table lists the capabilities of the AT-4.

Capability Limits Muzzle Velocity 290 meters per second (950 feet per second)Maximum Range 2,100 meters (6890 feet) Maximum Effective Range 300 meters (985 feet) Minimum Training Range 30 meters (99 feet) Minimum Combat Range 10 meters (33 feet)

Continued on next page

Page 373: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-6 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

General Characteristics, Continued

Descriptive Characteristics

The descriptive characteristics of the AT-4 are listed below: �� Lightweight. It is man-portable and is fired from the right shoulder. �� Self-contained.

�� Free-flight, fin-stabilized cartridge packed in an expendable launcher.

�� Issued as a round of ammunition. �� Requires minimum operator maintenance. �� The launcher serves as a watertight packing container for

transportation and storage. �� An anti-armor weapon.

�� Supplements other organic anti-armor weapons.

�� Provides anti-armor capability for the rifle squad and other units or installations that do not have organic anti-armor weapons.

�� Can be used offensively by assault and support elements.

Weight of Launcher

The AT-4 complete system weighs 14.8 pounds.

Technical Data The following table lists data that applies to the AT-4.

Dimension Measurement Weight of rocket 4 pounds Caliber of rocket 84 mm Length of Launcher 40 inches

Page 374: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-7 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

Components

AT-4 The gunner must be able to identify the major components of the AT-4. The

components are identified in the graphic below:

Transport Safety Pin

The transport safety pin provides for safe transportation. A lanyard attaches it to the AT-4.

Cocking Lever The cocking lever cocks the firing mechanism.

Firethrough Muzzle Cover

The firethrough muzzle cover keeps out moisture and prevents foreign objects from entering the muzzle.

Color Code Band

The color code band indicates the type of cartridge.

Continued on next page

Page 375: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-8 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

Components, Continued

Sights The AT-4 has two sights.

�� The rear sight consists of a sight blade, range setting knob, range

indicator, 2mm peephole, and a 7mm peephole. �� The front sight consists of a sight blade, a center post, and right and left

lead posts.

Venturi The venturi:

�� Protects the weapon from damage if it is dropped. �� Directs the flow of the backblast.

Forward Safety (Red Safety Catch)

The red safety catch must be fully depressed and held before pressing the trigger button or the AT-4 will not fire. It is also provided as a final safety measure.

Red Trigger Button

The red trigger button fires the weapon.

Shoulder Stop The shoulder stop helps to stabilize the AT-4 on the shoulder.

Carrying Sling The carrying sling provides a means for carrying the AT-4.

Page 376: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-9 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

Firing Mechanism

Components The firing mechanism is comprised of the

�� Red trigger button �� Enclosed firing rod with firing rod spring �� Three safety devices

�� Transport safety pin �� Cocking lever �� Forward safety

Red Trigger Button

The red trigger button is located between the cocking lever and forward safety as shown below.

Note: The weapon cannot be fired until all three safeties have been

disengaged.

Continued on next page

Page 377: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-10 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

Firing Mechanism, Continued

Transport Safety Pin

The transport safety pin blocks the firing pin from striking the cartridge percussion cap. To disengage the safety, pull it outward and release. See the diagram below.

Cocking Lever The cocking leaver separates the firing rod and trigger to prevent accidental

firing.

To cock, push the lever forward and rotate it downward and to the right. This will cause the firing rod to connect to the red trigger button as illustrated below.

Continued on next page

Page 378: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-11 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

Firing Mechanism, Continued

Forward Safety The forward safety is on the front end of the firing mechanism. It blocks the

firing rod from striking the firing pin. To disengage the forward safety, hold it down as shown below.

Page 379: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-12 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

Sights

Introduction The AT-4’s front and rear sights resemble those of the M16-series rifle. This

feature makes it easier to hit targets with the AT-4.

Front Sight As shown in the picture below, the front sight consists of

�� A sight blade (1) with a center post (2) �� Left and right lead posts (3) �� A semicircular white line (4) to help obtain the proper sight picture

Rear Sight As shown in the picture below, the rear sight consists of

�� A sight blade (6) �� A range setting knob (7) �� A range scale (8) with a range indicator (12) �� Two peepholes (11)

�� 2mm peephole (9) for normal light conditions �� 7mm peephole (10) for limited visibility

Continued on next page

Page 380: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-13 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

Sights, Continued

Opening the Sights

As shown in the picture below, to open the �� Rear sight cover. Press down on the sight cover and slide it forward. �� Front sight cover. Press down on the sight cover and slide it backwards.

Page 381: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-14 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

Packaging

Packaging the AT-4

AT-4s are individually wrapped in a plastic barrier bag and packed in wooden containers containing five AT-4s. The illustration below shows the packing of AT-4 containers.

Note: Do not stack containers more than four deep on a pallet, as shown below:

Page 382: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-15 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1

Marking

Introduction The AT-4 launchers are marked with color-code bands for proper

identification for use.

Markings of Container

Each wooden container is marked on the two corners that shows �� The color code for the type of round packed inside. �� The serial numbers and classification for each round.

Marking of Launcher

The color-code bands that represent use of the AT-4 are listed in the table below.

Bands Use Black/Yellow High explosive anti-tank Gold/Yellow Field handling trainer

(None) M287 9-mm tracer bullet trainer Note: Early models have a sold black band to indicate HE anti-armor

rounds

Page 383: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-16 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

10 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 8 by performing the actions required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 The primary mission for the AT-4 is to engage

a. tanks from the front. b. low flying aircraft. c. armored personnel carriers. d. open artillery positions.

Item 2 Which of the following is the maximum effective range in of the AT-4?

a. 290 meters b. 300 meters c. 1,800 meters d. 2,100 meters

Item 3 What are the descriptive characteristics of the AT-4?

a. Anti-armor weapon, air-cooled, gas-operated b. Self-contained, air-cooled, gas-operated c. Lightweight, self-contained, anti-armor weapon d. Lightweight, blowback-operated, anti-armor weapon

Continued on next page

Page 384: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-17 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 The purpose of the firethrough muzzle cover on the AT-4 launcher is to

a. indicate type of cartridge. b. keep moisture out of tube. c. provide codes for transporting. d. keep the firing mechanism from firing.

Item 5 What are the three safety devices that must be disengaged before firing the

AT-4? a. Red safety button, cocking safety lever, transport pin b. Transport safety pin, red safety button, firing pin c. Cocking lever, red trigger button, transport safety pin d. Transport safety pin, cocking lever, forward safety

Item 6 Where is the range setting knob found on the AT-4 launcher?

a. Rear sight b. Front sight c. Neither sight d. Both sights

Item 7 How deep, on a pallet, can you stack AT-4 containers?

a. 2 b. 6 c. 4 d. 8

Item 8 The color band used for the high explosive anti-tank cartridge is

a. red/yellow. b. gold/yellow. c. no band. d. black/yellow.

Continued on next page

Page 385: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-18 Study Unit 8, Lesson 1 Exercise

Lesson 1 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 c 8-5 2 b 8-5 3 c 8-6 4 b 8-7 5 d 8-9 6 a 8-12 7 c 8-14 8 d 8-14

Page 386: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-19 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2

LESSON 2

OPERATING PROCEDURES

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses how to inspect, fire, and take appropriate procedures

when a misfire occurs on the AT-4.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the steps for inspecting the AT-4. �� Identify the steps to fire the AT-4. �� Identify misfire procedures for combat using the AT-4.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 8-19 Inspecting 8-20 Firing 8-21 Misfire Procedures 8-27 Lesson 2 Exercise 8-29

Page 387: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-20 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2

Inspecting

Introduction The AT-4 is issued as a round of ammunition rather than a weapon; therefore,

it is completely sealed, making it waterproof until fired. Inspection is limited to the visual examination of the external components.

Procedure When opening the wooden container you should

�� Remove plastic bag �� Visually inspect for obvious damage The table below lists the components to be inspected.

Item Be sure that Transport Safety Pin �� It is in place and fully inserted.

�� The lanyard is attached to the pin. Cocking Lever �� It is in the safe position.

�� It is folded down. Firethrough Muzzle Cover

It is intact. Note: If it is ruptured or torn, cut it out. Be sure the

muzzle does not contain foreign objects. Sights The sights function properly by opening the sight

covers �� The sights pop up properly. �� The sights are not damaged.

Forward Safety It does not move when depressed. Rear Seal �� It is not cracked or damaged.

�� No foreign objects obstruct the rear of the AT-4. Shoulder Stop �� It is not broken or damaged.

�� It unsnaps. �� It folds down.

Carrying Sling �� It is not frayed. �� It is attached firmly to the AT-4.

Body There are no �� Cracks �� Dents �� Bulges

Page 388: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-21 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2

Firing

Procedure The following table lists the steps to prepare the AT-4 for firing.

Step Action 1 Cradle the weapon by removing the AT-4 from the carrying

position with the left arm as shown in the picture below.

WARNINGS:

�� Be sure to insert earplugs. �� Keep the weapon pointed towards the target. �� Keep the backblast area clear

2 Remove the transport safety pin by pulling it out with the right

hand and releasing it as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 389: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-22 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2

Firing, Continued

Procedure, continued

Step Action 3 Unsnap the shoulder stop and unfold it as shown in the picture

below.

4 Place the weapon on the right shoulder as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 390: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-23 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2

Firing, Continued

Procedure, continued

Step Action 5 As shown in the picture below, release the

�� Front sight

�� Press down on the front sight cover �� Slide the cover to the rear

�� Rear sight

�� Press down on the rear sight cover �� Slide the cover to the front

Continued on next page

Page 391: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-24 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2

Firing, Continued

Procedure, continued

Step Action

6 To cock the AT-4 �� Unfold the cocking lever with the right hand. �� Place the thumb under the cocking lever. �� Push the cocking lever forward and then down to the right. �� Place the fingers in front of the firing mechanism for added

support. �� Let the cocking lever slide back as shown in the picture below.

CAUTION: Do not refold the cocking lever or it will interfere

with the firing mechanism.

Continued on next page

Page 392: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-25 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2

Firing, Continued

Procedure, continued

Step Action 7 Make sure your backblast area is large enough and that it is free of

obstructions. Then, stabilize the weapon by pressing the shoulder stop against the shoulder as shown below. Note: For added stability

�� Grasp the carrying sling near the muzzle with the left hand �� Pull back on the carrying sling until the shoulder stop is snug

against the shoulder

8 Adjust the rear sight. If the range to target is

�� Under 250 meters--no adjustment is necessary �� More than 250 meters--adjust the rear sight range setting To adjust the range setting, turn the range setting knob toward the desired setting as shown in the picture below.

Continued on next page

Page 393: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-26 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2

Firing, Continued

Procedure, continued

Step Action

9 With your index and middle fingers on your right hand, hold the forward safety down and to your left as shown in the picture below.

10 Fire the AT-4 launcher by pressing the red fire button.

Note: Ensure you check the back blast area before firing.

Page 394: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-27 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2

Misfire Procedures

Causes A misfire is a complete failure to fire and may be caused by a faulty

�� Firing mechanism �� Element in the propelling charge explosive train �� Forward safety not depressed far enough

While Training While training with the AT-4, should you encounter a misfire, follow the

steps provided in the table below.

Step Action 1 Immediately shout, “Misfire!” 2 Maintain original sight picture. 3 Release the forward safety. 4 Recock the launcher. 5 Press the forward safety all the way down. 6 Attempt to fire.

Failure to Fire After you have performed the misfire steps listed above and the weapon still

fails to fire, perform the steps below for disposal of the launcher.

Step Action 1 Shout misfire again.

2 Release the forward safety and move the cocking lever to the safe (uncocked) position.

3 Take the AT-4 off your shoulder while keeping the muzzle pointed toward the target.

4 Reinsert the transport safety pin.

5 Wait two minutes and then carefully lay the launcher on the ground with the muzzle facing toward the target.

6 Dispose AT-4 launcher according to your unit’s SOP.

Continued on next page

Page 395: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-28 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2

Misfire Procedures, Continued

During Combat If a misfire occurs during combat, perform the same steps as those performed

during training.

Failure to Fire During Combat

In combat if the AT-4 fails to fire after performing misfire procedures �� Break off the sights to identify the misfired launcher. �� Place on the ground (pointing toward enemy) and use another launcher.

Page 396: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-29 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 3 by performing the actions required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Inspection of the AT-4 is limited to the

a. visual examination of the external components. b. physical examination of all functional components. c. firing mechanism only. d. transport safety pin and sights only.

Item 2 The first step in the firing the AT-4 is to

a. press the red safety catch. b. remove the transport safety pin. c. cradle the weapon. d. stabilize the weapon.

Item 3 The gunner released the forward safety while performing misfire procedures

on an AT-4. What is the next step the gunner must perform? a. Shout misfire. b. Recock the launcher. c. Repress the forward safety. d. Attempt to fire.

Continued on next page

Page 397: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-30 Study Unit 8, Lesson 2 Exercise

Lesson 2 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 a 8-20 2 c 8-21 3 b 8-27

Page 398: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-31 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

LESSON 3

MARKSMANSHIP FUNDAMENTALS

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope This lesson discusses the fundamentals of marksmanship of the AT-4.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the proper distance between the right eye and rear sight when

aiming the AT-4. �� Identify the correct placement of the front sight lead posts when firing at

moving targets using the AT-4. �� Identify the “steady hold” technique for firing the AT-4. �� Identify the firing positions for the AT-4. �� Identify the backblast danger zones for the AT-4 in an infantry fighting

position. �� Identify the conditions a building must meet to allow firing an AT-4 from

inside.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 8-31 Aiming 8-32 Firing 8-34 Firing Positions 8-35 Firing Considerations 8-42 Firing from Enclosures (Combat Only) 8-43 Lesson 3 Exercise 8-44

Page 399: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-32 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

Aiming

Eye Relief To sight the AT-4, first determine the range to the target. Once you have

determined the range, place the AT-4 in position on the right shoulder so the right eye is 2½ to 3 inches from the rear sight.

Sight Picture A correct sight picture is obtained when the sights are properly aligned and

the aiming point (target) is in the correct relationship to the front sight posts as shown in the picture below. The sight picture includes two basic elements: �� Sight alignment �� Placement of the front sight lead posts

Continued on next page

Page 400: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-33 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

Aiming, Continued

Sight Alignment

To obtain correct sight alignment, the sights must be aligned as shown in the picture below. Ensure the proper sight alignment by looking through the rear sight peephole and focus your eye on the front sight post. The top center of the front sight posts are in the center of the rear sight peephole. Note: The white line fits inside the bottom half of the 2mm peephole.

Placement of Front Lead Post

The table below outlines the placement of the front lead post in various conditions.

Target Pace Direction Place the…

Stationary N/A Center post at the center of the visible mass of the target.

Slow Any Center post at the front in the direction that the vehicle is moving.

Right Left lead post at the center of mass. Left Right lead post at the center of mass. Oblique Center post at the front in the direction that

the vehicle is moving.

Fast (Greater than 10 MPH)

Toward or Away

Center post at the center of the visible mass of the target.

Page 401: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-34 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

Firing

Steady Hold When firing the AT-4, apply the “steady hold.” As the term implies, steady

hold is the technique of holding the AT-4 as steady as possible by �� Holding the AT-4 in a tight, comfortable position as shown in the picture

below so the AT-4 becomes a natural extension of the body.

�� Grasping with the left hand, the carrying sling where it is attached to the

AT-4 near the muzzle.

�� Holding down the forward safety with the index and middle fingers of the right hand.

�� Pulling on the carrying sling with the left hand and at the same time, pulling back to the rear with the right hand. This helps to get the shoulder stop fully seated into the pocket of the shoulder.

�� Holding the elbows close to the body to aid in balance and control and to counter jerking and flinching.

Page 402: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-35 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

Firing Positions

Introduction The AT-4 is fired from the right shoulder only in the following positions

�� Standing �� Kneeling �� Sitting �� Prone Note: The exact position may vary slightly to allow for the shape of the

shooter's body with individual preference governing the selection of the best position.

Standing Position

The standing position, as shown in the picture below, is similar to the off-hand position for firing a rifle and will expose you more than any other position. Choose this position when firing from behind a protective barrier, such as a wall or a fighting position.

Continued on next page

Page 403: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-36 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

Firing Positions, Continued

Standing Position

To assume a proper standing position, follow the steps in the table below:

Step Action

1 Raise the AT-4 about shoulder level, keeping the AT-4 pointed towards the target while rotating your body under the AT-4 by doing a half-left face.

2 Spread your feet a comfortable distance apart and place the AT-4 on your right shoulder. Your body should be balanced with the hips level. Your left (non-firing) hand should be directly under the front of the AT-4 grasping the carrying sling.

3 Place your left elbow against the body for stability. 4 Grasp the firing mechanism with your right (firing) hand and keep

your right elbow placed tightly against your body.

Note: This position is preferred to track moving targets. It allows you to turn your body from the waist up and not move your feet.

Kneeling Position

There are two satisfactory kneeling positions. �� The first kneeling position, is similar to the kneeling supported position

for firing a rifle. �� The second kneeling position, is a modification of the first kneeling

position. This kneeling position is the best position for tracking moving targets.

Continued on next page

Page 404: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-37 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

Firing Positions, Continued

Modified Kneeling Position

To assume this position, look at the table below.

Step Action 1 Assume the standing position. 2 Kneel on your right knee and point your left leg towards the target. 3 Keep your left foot at a right angle and opposite your right knee,

forming a right angle to the ground with the left leg. 4 Sit back on your right heel while shifting your weight forward. 5 Rest your left elbow just forward of your left knee. 6 Hold your right elbow firmly against the body.

Continued on next page

Page 405: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-38 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

Firing Positions, Continued

Basic Kneeling Position

To get into this kneeling position, follow the steps below. Use this position to engage moving targets.

Step Action 1 Assume the standing position. 2 Kneel on your right knee, keeping your thigh of the right leg

vertical. Keep your buttock and back straight. 3 Point your left leg towards the target, keeping your left foot at a

right angle and opposite your right knee. 4 Keep your left thigh parallel to the ground. 5 Keep your elbows tucked against your sides.

Note: Either kneeling position may be used when firing at stationary or

moving targets and the use of protective barriers and supported positions are essential to increase stability and reduce vulnerability.

Continued on next page

Page 406: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-39 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

Firing Positions, Continued

Sitting Position There are two sitting positions. The sitting positions are suitable for firing at

stationary targets and are more stable than the kneeling positions. The modified sitting position is primarily used on downward slopes.

Modified Sitting Position

To assume the modified sitting position, follow the steps listed below:

Step Action 1 Keep the AT-4 pointed towards the target and execute a half-left

face. 2 Sit with your legs crossed and place the AT-4 on your right

shoulder. 3 Lean slightly forward from the hips and rest your elbows forward

of the knees to avoid bone-to-bone contact.

Continued on next page

Page 407: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-40 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

Firing Positions, Continued

Basic Sitting Position

To assume the basic sitting position, follow the steps listed in the table below.

Step Action 1 Keep the AT-4 pointed towards the target and execute a half-left

face. 2 Sit with your legs partially extended and well apart and place the

AT-4 on your right shoulder. 3 Dig your heels in the ground to keep from sliding down. 4 Rest your elbows forward of the knees to avoid bone-to-bone

contact.

Continued on next page

Page 408: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-41 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

Firing Positions, Continued

Prone Position This position is the most dangerous position due to its proximity to the

ground. Ideally, the ground should slope downward from the rear of the launcher. This slope reduces the effects of the backblast.

Assume the Prone Position

To get into the prone position, follow the steps in the below table:

Step Action 1 Lay the launcher on the ground, pointed toward the target. 2 Lie on your stomach at an angle of not less than 90o to the line of

fire. Important: Keep your body clear of the backblast.

3 Your body should be straight and your right leg should be directly on a line running through your right hip and right shoulder.

4 Move your left leg to the left as far as possible without discomfort.

5 Keep both heels as close to the ground as possible with your right eye lined up with the sights.

Page 409: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-42 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

Firing Considerations

Infantry Fighting Position

You can fire the AT-4 from the standard infantry fighting position. You must ensure the venturi protrudes past the rear of the position to minimize the danger to friendly troops due to backblast as shown in the picture below.

Backblast Danger Zones

The area immediately to the rear of an AT-4 must not have walls, large trees, or any other obstructions within 5 meters (Zone A) that can deflect the backblast onto you, as shown in the dark shaded area in the picture below. The backblast danger area (Zone B) is 60 meters deep with a 90o fan from the rear of the weapon, as the picture below, should be free of personnel.

Page 410: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-43 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3

Firing From Enclosures (Combat Only)

Introduction Firing from an enclosure creates unique hazards. Leaders must consider

several factors that affect safety.

Considerations Fire from a building only when all of the following conditions are met:

�� The building must be of sturdy construction. �� The ceiling must be at least 8 feet high. �� The room floor size must be at least 17 by 24 feet. �� There must be an opening of at least 20 square feet to the rear of the AT-4

for the backblast pressure to escape. An open door at least 7 feet high by 3 feet wide would provide adequate ventilation.

�� All glass must be removed from the windows, and all loose objects

removed from the room. �� All Marines within the room must be forward of the backblast area of the

AT-4. �� All Marines in the room must protect their hearing with ear plugs when

the AT-4 is fired. �� The muzzle of the AT-4 must protrude 6 inches beyond the opening from

which the AT-4 will be fired. Note: When employed in multistoried buildings, the AT-4 should be

positioned on upper levels for maximum coverage.

Page 411: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-44 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

10 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 6 by performing the actions required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 When aiming the AT-4, the right eye should be at a distance of _________

inches from the rear sight. a. 2 to 3 b. 2 to 3½ c. 2½ to 3 d. 2½ to 3½

Item 2 While aiming at a slow moving vehicle (any direction), place the lead post of

the front sight a. center post at the center of the visible mass of the target. b. center post at the front in which direction the vehicle is moving. c. left lead post at the front in which direction the vehicle is moving. d. right lead post at the front in which direction the vehicle is moving.

Item 3 What technique is used to hold the AT-4 in a comfortable tight position?

a. Steady grasp b. Steady hold c. Standing d. Sitting

Continued on next page

Page 412: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-45 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 When engaging moving targets, what two firing positions are recommended?

a. Standing and prone b. Prone and sitting c. Sitting and kneeling d. Standing and kneeling

Item 5 Backblast danger zone “B” has a 90-degree fan from the rear of the weapon,

is _______ meters deep, and free of personnel. a. 30 b. 40 c. 50 d. 60

Item 6 When firing the AT-4 from inside a building, an open door at least ___ feet

high by ___ feet wide will provide adequate ventilation. a. 7, 3 b. 8, 4 c. 10, 5 d. 11, 6

Continued on next page

Page 413: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-46 Study Unit 8, Lesson 3 Exercise

Lesson 3 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 c 8-32 2 b 8-33 3 b 8-34 4 d 8-36/8-38 5 d 8-42 6 a 8-43

Page 414: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-47 Study Unit 8, Lesson 4

LESSON 4

TECHNIQUES OF FIRE AND RANGE DETERMINATION

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope Marines who fire the AT-4 must learn how to determine range and vehicle

speed to be successful in hitting their intended target.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the methods of determining range. �� Identify how to estimate how far a vehicle moves in one second. �� Identify the different methods to engage targets using the AT-4.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 8-47 Range Determination 8-48 Speed and Distance Estimation 8-49 Methods of Target Engagement 8-50 Lesson 4 Exercise 8-54

Page 415: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-48 Study Unit 8, Lesson 4

Range Determination

Introduction To be successful at hitting targets with the AT-4, we must first be able to

accurately determine how far the target is from us.

Methods The methods for determining range are listed below.

�� Range finders �� Measuring the distance on a map �� Pacing (most desirable in defense) �� Using visual range estimation (least desirable)

Predetermined Range

Any of the methods listed above may be used; however, range to expected armor engagement locations should be predetermined and recorded on the �� Range card �� Squad sector sketch

Page 416: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-49 Study Unit 8, Lesson 4

Speed and Distance Estimation

Introduction The AT-4 is designed primarily for use against armored vehicles. Often these

targets are in motion, and accurate engagement depends on the your ability to determine speed and range.

Speed The ability to determine speed is developed through constant practice. One

method of speed determination is to estimate how fast a vehicle moves during one second. Start counting when the front end of the vehicle passes a chosen object, shown in the black figure below. Count “one thousand one” (takes one second).

IF… THEN… More than half of the vehicle passes the object shown in the outline figure below.

Estimate the vehicle as being fast.

Less than half of the vehicle passes the object. Estimate the vehicle as being slow.

Note: If you don't have an object to use to estimate how fast a vehicle is

moving, you will have to estimate the vehicle speed and determine if the vehicle is moving slow or fast. Consider all oblique moving vehicles to be slow and all flank moving vehicles to be fast.

Page 417: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-50 Study Unit 8, Lesson 4

Methods of Target Engagement

Introduction As leaders, we must think of how we are going to engage the target with the

assets available. This section covers the methods to engage targets with the AT-4.

Single Firing In single firing, a Marine fires one AT-4 with no succeeding shots fired at the

target. Use this method only �� At short ranges (200 meters or less) when you have not determined

range to target �� When you have accurately determined the range to the target at ranges

longer than 200 meters

Note: Range determination and the fundamentals of AT-4 marksmanship

must be emphasized. Practice and test �� Sight alignment �� Steady hold positions �� Placing the AT-4 into and out of operation

Page 418: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-51 Study Unit 8, Lesson 4

Methods of Target Engagement, Continued

Sequence Firing

A shooter who is equipped with two or more AT-4s and engages the target must �� Inspect and prepare the AT-4s before firing them. �� Observe the impact of the first round and continue to fire until the target is

destroyed as shown in the illustration below.

Continued on next page

Page 419: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-52 Study Unit 8, Lesson 4

Methods of Target Engagement, Continued

Pair Firing In this case, two or more shooters equipped with two or more AT-4s engage

a single target and each shooter inspects and prepares several AT-4s. �� The first shooter announces the estimated range and the lead to be used

and fires. �� The second shooter observes the firing and announces a revised estimate

of the range and lead if the target is not hit. Example: The first gunner who sees the target identifies it and announces:

“BMP, one five zero meters, fast target.” Note: Each shooter continues exchanging range and lead information until

the target is destroyed as shown in the illustration below:

WARNING: Be sure each shooter is clear of the other’s backblast area.

Continued on next page

Page 420: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-53 Study Unit 8, Lesson 4

Methods of Target Engagement, Continued

Volley Firing On a prearranged signal, two or more firers engage a single target. This

method is desirable because more rounds are fired at a target at one given time, increasing the probability of killing the target as shown in the illustration below.

Note: You must determine the range to the target before firing.

Continued on next page

Page 421: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-54 Study Unit 8, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 3 by performing the actions required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Which of the following is the least desirable method of range determination?

a. Range finders b. Pacing c. Firing the pair and sequence method d. Visual range estimation

Item 2 If less than half the vehicle passes an object in one second, the gunner can

estimate the vehicle speed as being a. stationary. b. slow. c. fast d. moderate.

Item 3 One shooter with two or more AT-4s can employ which method of target

engagement? a. Single firing b. Sequence firing c. Pair firing d. Volley firing

Continued on next page

Page 422: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-55 Study Unit 8, Lesson 4 Exercise

Lesson 4 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 d 8-49 2 b 8-49 3 b 8-51

Page 423: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-56 Study Unit 8, Lesson 4 Exercise

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Page 424: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-57 Study Unit 8, Lesson 5

LESSON 5

CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS

Introduction

Estimated Study Time

25 minutes

Lesson Scope The AT-4 has greater penetrating power and after-armor effect than previous

light antiarmor weapons. Use of the AT-4 is not limited to armored vehicles; it is also effective against bunkers and field fortifications.

Learning Objectives

After completing this lesson, you should be able to �� Identify the ways armored vehicles can be destroyed using the AT-4. �� Identify the safety considerations for the AT-4. �� Identify the backblast danger zones of the AT-4. �� Identify the range firing precautions to be taken before firing the AT-4. �� Select the methods to tactically employ the AT-4.

In This Lesson This lesson contains the following topics:

Topic See Page Introduction 8-57 Destroying Armor 8-58 Safety Considerations 8-60 Backblast Area 8-61 Range Firing Precautions 8-62 Tactical Employment 8-63 Lesson 5 Exercise 8-64

Page 425: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-58 Study Unit 8, Lesson 5

Destroying Armor

Introduction Armored vehicles have more protection on their front slopes, leaving them

more venerable on their sides (flank). Shooters should try to engage an armored vehicle from the side or rear whenever possible. See the illustration below.

Note: You should always aim center of mass hit on a target to allow for a

greater chance of a target hit.

Target Hits Hits on armored vehicles hits can be classified into the following groups:

�� Mobility kills �� Firepower kills �� Catastrophic kills

Mobility Kill A mobility kill has occurred if

�� The vehicle has stopped moving because a track or road wheel has been

blown off. �� The vehicle has been hit in the engine compartment. Important: The vehicle is no longer mobile, but it can still return fire.

Continued on next page

Page 426: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-59 Study Unit 8, Lesson 5

Destroying Armor, Continued

Firepower Kill The main gun cannot return fire because a hit in the turret has knocked out its

capability to fire. Note: The vehicle can still move and can get away.

Catastrophic Kill

The vehicle can neither move nor return fire. For all practical purposes, it is destroyed. Note: To get a catastrophic kill, shooters should be prepared to fire a second

or possibly a third shot to destroy the vehicle.

Visibility of Armored Vehicles

When an armored vehicle is buttoned up, the crew’ s visibility is restricted to around ten meters as shown in the picture below. This provides an opportunity for an armor killer team to approach the vehicle with less risk of detection.

Obstacles Natural or manmade obstacles force a vehicle to slow down, stop, or

channelize the vehicle, increasing the shooter’s chance for a possible first round hit.

Page 427: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-60 Study Unit 8, Lesson 5

Safety Considerations

Introduction Before firing the AT-4, the gunner must think about safety. Below are some

safety precautions that must be considered.

Safety Considerations

Follow these safety precautions when using the AT-4. �� Always observe the backblast area danger zones. �� Do not fire the AT-4 when temperatures exceed its operating limits of -40

to 140 degrees Fahrenheit. �� Do not engage targets closer than the minimum arming range. During

training, do not engage targets closer than 30 meters. �� Do not fire the tracer trainer device and tracer trainer cartridge at targets at

a range of less than 125 meters because of the possibility of ricochet. Use wooden targets for stationary targets when possible.

�� All personnel must wear hearing protection when the AT-4s are fired. �� Do not fire the AT-4 over the heads of friendly troops unless protection is

adequate against direct impact and other hazards.

Page 428: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-61 Study Unit 8, Lesson 5

Backblast Area

Introduction The AT-4 is a closed chamber weapon with a plexiglass baseplate at the rear.

When the weapon is fired, gas pressure builds up inside the chamber and ruptures the baseplate. The gases exit the rear of the weapon in the form of a backblast.

Blackblast Backblast can severely injure personnel and damage equipment. The total

backblast area extends 65 meters (216 feet) to the rear of the AT-4.

Danger Zones Clear the following danger zones before firing AT-4s:

�� Danger Zone A

�� This zone extends 5 meters immediately to the rear of the AT-4. It must be absolutely clear of all obstacles.

�� Clear away all obstacles, such as barriers, trees, or other vertical objects because of the risk of debris ricocheting. Any obstacle behind the shooter may deflect the backblast onto the shooter and cause injury.

�� Backblast heat or flying debris may injure the shooter and other Marines in this zone.

�� Danger Zone B. This zone extends 60 meters beyond danger Zone A in a

90-degree fan from the rear of the AT-4. Danger exists from backblast heat and from flying debris thrown to the rear by the force of the backblast. These debris and heat may cause injure to personnel and damage equipment.

Page 429: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-62 Study Unit 8, Lesson 5

Range Firing Precautions

Precautions While firing on the range, follow these precautions.

�� Before firing, clear the entire backblast area of all personnel, equipment,

and flammable material. �� Do not allow any personnel within 75 meters of the area behind the firing

line without permission of the range safety officer or officer in charge. �� Be sure that all shooters wear ear protection. �� Cover all AT-4s to protect them from prolonged exposure to direct

sunlight.

Page 430: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-63 Study Unit 8, Lesson 5

Tactical Employment

Who Marines who normally carry the M16A2 service rifle also carry and use the

AT-4. The AT-4 supplements other organic anti-armor weapons.

Offense In the attack, AT-4s should be readily available to influence the action

because of its relatively short range, spread the AT-4 throughout the maneuver element. Use the AT-4 primarily against armored vehicles, although you may also use it against �� Light vehicles �� Bunkers �� Crew-served weapon positions

Defense In the defense, the AT-4 can play an important role in stopping the enemy.

Here are some considerations for the use of the AT4 in the defense. �� Consider the AT-4 backblast when selecting and constructing fighting

positions. �� Provide two or more AT-4s to positions that are assigned to fire AT-4s. �� Consider placing positions to achieve flank shots on enemy avenues of

approach. �� Dispersion should also be considered to increase the probability of

obtaining oblique fire on enemy armor approaching your defensive position.

Other Operations

Because of its light weight, the AT-4 can be use against such targets as command posts, communication installations, and supply dumps and is an excellent weapon for �� Combat patrols �� Ambush parties �� Raiding parties

Page 431: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-64 Study Unit 8, Lesson 5 Exercise

Lesson 5 Exercise

Estimated Study Time

5 minutes

Directions Complete items 1 through 5 by performing the actions required. Check your

answers against those listed at the end of this lesson.

Item 1 Armored vehicle hits can be classified into which three groups?

a. Track kill, firepower kill, turret kill b. Turret kill, mobility kill, firepower kill c. Mobility kill, firepower kill, catastrophic kill d. Catastrophe kill, track kill, mobility

Item 2 Which of the following is a safety consideration to be observed before firing

the AT-4? a. Impact danger zones b. Venturi danger c. Danger zone area d. Operating temperature limits

Item 3 Backblast danger zone A extends _____ meters immediately to the rear of the

AT-4. a. 5 b. 15 c. 30 d. 60

Continued on next page

Page 432: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-65 Study Unit 8, Lesson 5 Exercise

Lesson 5 Exercise, Continued

Item 4 When firing AT-4s on a range, the gunner needs to consider which of the

following? a. Cover the AT-4s to protect them prolong exposure from direct sunlight. b. Wear protective masks and double the backblast area dimensions. c. Do not allow personnel within 70 meters behind the firing line. d. Equipment and flammable materials are kept at least 50 meters behind the

shooter.

Item 5 The methods of tactical employment for the AT-4 are offense,

a. defense, and other operations. b. defense, and tactical support. c. tactical support, and special operations. d. special operations, and fire support operations.

Continued on next page

Page 433: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A 8-66 Study Unit 8, Lesson 5 Exercise

Lesson 5 Exercise, Continued

Answers The table below provides the answers to the exercise items. If you have any

questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 c 8-58 2 d 8-60 3 a 8-61 4 a 8-62 5 a 8-63

Page 434: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-1 Review Lesson Examination

WEAPONS

REVIEW LESSON EXAMINATION

Review Lesson

Estimated Study Time

1 hour, 20 minutes

Introduction The purpose of the review lesson examination is to prepare you for your final

examination. We recommend that you try to complete your review lesson examination without referring to the text, but for those items (questions) you are unsure of, restudy the text. When you finish your review lesson and are satisfied with your responses, check your responses against the answers provided at the end of this review lesson examination.

Directions Select the ONE answer that BEST completes the statement or that answers

the item. For multiple choice items, circle your response. For matching items, place the letter of your response in the space provided.

Item 1 A role for the M9 pistol is to provide

a. timely and accurate fire in a close combat situation. b. a means of defense for personnel assigned the M249 SAW. c. a means of defense for personnel assigned a crew served weapon. d. close fire support for in a combat situation.

Item 2 What is the maximum effective range in meters of the M9 pistol?

a. 10 b. 25 c. 50 d. 75

Continued on next page

Page 435: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-2 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 3 What is the sixth step in the cycle of operation of the M9 service pistol?

a. Locking b. Unlocking c. Extracting d. Ejecting

Item 4 What is the standard ammunition used for the M9 pistol?

a. Any 9mm cartridge b. 9mm armor piercing NATO round c. 9mm ball NATO M882 d. 9mm tracer NATO round

Item 5 After removing the magazine, what is the next step to clear the M9 pistol?

a. Lock slide to the rear b. Inspect the chamber c. Release the slide to go forward d. Place the weapon on safe

Item 6 What is the second step when disassembling the slide group from the receiver

of the M9 pistol? a. Depress the disassembly button b. Inspect the chamber c. Rotate the disassembly lever d. Slide the assembly off the receiver track

Item 7 What are authorized cleaners/lubricants used on the M9 pistol?

a. RBC/CLP b. LSL/LSA c. CLP/LAW d. RBC/LSL

Continued on next page

Page 436: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-3 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 8 In extremely cold temperatures, ______ is used to lubricate the M9 pistol.

a. CLP b. LAW c. RBC d. LSL

Item 9 In hot and humid environments, ________________ to prevent moisture and

rust. a. inspect the M9 pistol daily b. keep the M9 pistol muzzle and receiver covered c. remove excess oil from the M9 pistol d. keep the M9 pistol free of moisture and lubricate daily

Item 10 To assemble the M9 pistol, the steps are

a. the reverse of disassembly. b. identical to disassembly. c. only applicable to the first method. d. only applicable to the second method.

Item 11 Identify the first step in performing a function check on the M9 pistol.

a. Retract slide to rear. b. Insert empty magazine. c. Ensure safety lever is in safe position. d. Ensure safety lever is in up position.

Item 12 You are loading the M9 pistol. The first round from the magazine is

chambered when a. the magazine catch is heard. b. the slide is retracted to the rear. c. the slide is released after it has been retracted to the rear. d. you insert the loaded magazine into the magazine well.

Continued on next page

Page 437: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-4 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 13 Where do you place your firing hand thumb when engaging targets with the

M9 pistol? a. Resting alongside the weapon. b. Wrapped along the pistol grip. c. Alongside non-firing thumb. d. Resting between middle finger.

Item 14 You are firing your M9 pistol and it fails to operate. What type of stoppage

has occurred? a. Failure to extract. b. Failure to fire. c. Failure to chamber. d. Failure to cock.

Item 15 The unhesitating application of a probable remedy when your M9 pistol fails

to fire without investigating the cause of the malfunction is defined as a. stoppage. b. immediate action. c. an unintentional interruption in the weapon’s cycle of operation. d. any unintentional interruption in the weapon.

Continued on next page

Page 438: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-5 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 16 Use the following list to answer the question below.

1. Supplements other supporting fires 2. Destroys groups of enemy personnel 3. Provides close fire support in the assault 4. Supplements other organic anti-armor weapons 5. Destroys bunkers and fortified positions 6. Fires on enemy troops and automatic weapons in defilade Which are the four capabilities of the M203 grenade launcher? a. 1, 2, 4, 5 b. 2, 3, 5, 6 c. 1, 2, 3, 6 d. 1, 3, 4, 6

Item 17 When engaging a point target, what is the maximum effective range in meters

of the M203 grenade launcher? a. 100 b. 150 c. 250 d. 350

Item 18 What type of M203 ammunition is used to engage enemy personnel armed

with automatic weapons and dug into fighting positions? a. HE b. CS c. VT Frag d. TP

Continued on next page

Page 439: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-6 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 19 Below in scrambled order are the steps for clearing the M203 grenade

launcher. Put the steps in the proper order. Then answer the question. 1. Inspect the breech. 2. Slide the barrel assembly forward. 3. Depress the barrel latch. 4. Place the weapon on safe by lowering the safety. Which is the correct sequence of steps for clearing the M203 grenade launcher? a. 1, 2, 3, 4 b. 4, 1, 3, 2 c. 4, 2, 3, 1 d. 4, 3, 2, 1

Item 20 Which component of the M203 grenade launcher is removed first during

disassembly? a. Leaf sight, barrel, handguard b. Quadrant sight c. Barrel d. Handguard

Continued on next page

Page 440: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-7 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 21 What is the only authorized lubricant for the M203 grenade launcher?

a. LAW b. CLP c. LSA d. Dry cleaning solvent

Item 22 What is used to clean the bore of the M203 grenade launcher?

a. Thong, CLP, LAW, rag b. Bore Brush, CLP, RBC c. Rag, Bore Brush, RBC d. Thong, rag, Bore Brush, CLP

Item 23 In a below freezing environment, what is the best thing to do with the M203

grenade launcher if you are going to be sleeping in a sleeping bag? a. Keep the weapon in the sleeping bag with you. b. Stage the weapon with a gear guard in a warming tent. c. Keep the weapon with you but outside of the sleeping bag. d. Disassemble the weapon, then bring it in the sleeping bag.

Item 24 You are assembling the M203 grenade launcher. Before sliding the barrel

assembly onto the receiver, you must first a. depress the barrel stop. b. tighten the mounting screw. c. remove the leaf sight. d. mount the quadrant sight.

Continued on next page

Page 441: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-8 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 25 What area of operation is checked when performing a function check on the

M203 grenade launcher? a. Safety and trigger b. Barrel stop and latch c. Both the safety and trigger and barrel stop and latch d. Cocking and safety

Item 26 Which M203 grenade launcher firing method would you use to engage targets

at 200 meters? a. Leaf sight and front sight post b. Rifle sight c. Quadrant sight d. Hip-shoot

Item 27 To adjust the leaf sight to increase the range for the M203 grenade launcher,

use the adjustment screw to a. lower the leaf sight. b. raise the leaf sight. c. center the rear sight. d. align the rear and front sight.

Item 28 One notch of the M203 quadrant sight equals ___ meters at ____ meters.

a. 5; 100 b. 5; 200 c. 10; 100 d. 10; 200

Continued on next page

Page 442: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-9 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 29 Suddenly, you realize that an ammunition casing is stuck in the breech of

your M203 grenade launcher. The stoppage that has just occurred is failure to a. cock. b. extract. c. fire. d. unlock.

Item 30 What is the first thing you should do if your M203 grenade launcher has a

misfire? a. Execute “Tap, Rap, Bang.” b. Open the breach, let the round fall to the ground. Load another round and

attempt to fire. c. Shout “Misfire” and keep the weapon pointed down range. d. Remove the round and examine it for a dented primer.

Item 31 Which of the following is the effective casualty radius in meters of the M203

grenade launcher? a. 1 b. 5 c. 10 d. 15

Continued on next page

Page 443: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-10 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Items 32 Through 34

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the employment method from column 2 that best describes the employment situation in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used more than once.

Column 1 M203 Grenade Launcher Employment Situation

Column 2 M203 Grenade Launcher Employment Method

___ 32. Destroys groups of enemy personnel.

___ 33. Enables you to deliver fire over the entire fire team sector.

___ 34. M16A2 rifle is employed until suitable targets appear.

a. Offensive b. Defensive

Item 35 Below is a list of capabilities. Select the capabilities that are applicable to the

M249 SAW. Then, answer the question. 1. Supports rear security and special missions 2. Supports the advance of the squad by fire in the offense 3. Provides a fixed, final protective line across the squad front in the defense 4. Supplements other supporting fires 5. Provides close and continuous fire in support of front-line rifle squads 6. Provides an increased volume of fire for a squad in the offense 7. Provides long-range, close defensive, final protective fires as part of the

squad's defensive lines Which are the five missions applicable to the M249 SAW? a. 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 b. 1, 4, 5, 6, 7 c. 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 d. 2, 4, 5, 6, 7

Continued on next page

Page 444: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-11 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 36 What is the maximum effective range of the M249 SAW in meters for an area

target? a. 700 b. 1,000 c. 1,100 d. 3,600

Item 37 What are the principal characteristics of the M249 SAW?

a. Blowback-operated, air-cooled, belt-fed b. Gas-operated, water-cooled, belt or magazine-fed c. Gas-operated, air-cooled, belt- or magazine-fed d. Recoil-operated, water-cooled, belt- or magazine-fed

Item 38 Below are listings of cycles of operations. Identify which list for the M249

SAW is correct. a. Chambering, locking, feeding, firing, unlocking, ejecting, extracting,

cocking b. Cocking, locking, feeding, chambering, firing, unlocking, extracting,

ejecting c. Feeding, chambering, locking, firing, unlocking, extracting, ejecting,

cocking d. Unlocking, feeding, firing, locking, cocking, ejecting, extracting,

chambering

Item 39 Which of the following lists ammunition types used with the M249 SAW?

a. Ball, incendiary, tracer, blank b. Ball, dummy, tracer, armor-piercing c. Ball, tracer, dummy, blank d. High explosive, tracer, dummy, blank

Continued on next page

Page 445: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-12 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 40 Below in scrambled order are the steps for clearing the M249 SAW during an

emergency situation. Put the steps in the proper order. Then, answer the question. 1. Push safety to the left until red ring is visible. 2. Raise the feed tray. Inspect the chamber and remove any ammunition

there. 3. Push down on the magazine tab; remove the magazine. 4. Hold the cocking handle to the rear, depress the trigger, and ride the bolt

forward. 5. Charge the M249 SAW. 6. Lower the feed tray. Be sure the cover assembly is locked. 7. Push safety to right (safe). Which is the correct sequence for clearing the M249 SAW? a. 2, 5, 7, 3, 1, 4, 6 b. 3, 2, 5, 7, 6, 1, 4 c. 5, 7, 2, 3, 1, 4, 6 d. 5, 7, 3, 2, 6, 1, 4

Continued on next page

Page 446: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-13 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Items 41 Through 44

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the component of the M249 SAW from column 2 that is described by the function in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 M249 SAW Function

Column 2 M249 SAW Component

___ 41. Houses the firing pin and roller assembly.

___ 42. Transfers power from propelling gases to the bolt slide assembly to operate the weapon.

___ 43. Locks the bipod in place on the receiver and provides a passageway for operating gases.

___ 44. Supports all major components and controls the functioning of the weapon.

a. Piston b. Receiver c. Slide d. Gas cylinder

Item 45 Which list correctly states some of the main groups of the M249 SAW?

a. Barrel, operating rod assembly, piston, buttstock and shoulder assembly,

bipod, trigger mechanism, receiver, gas cylinder b. Slide, piston, barrel assembly, trigger mechanism, bipod, gas regulator,

handguards, operating rod assembly c. Gas cylinder, operating rod assembly, barrel assembly, handguard, trigger

mechanism, buttstock, and shoulder assembly d. Buttstock and shoulder assembly, slide assembly and bolt, gas regulator,

receiver, bipod, cocking handle, trigger mechanism, piston

Continued on next page

Page 447: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-14 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 46 The bolt must be forward to prevent death or injury before removing which

assembly of the M249 SAW? a. Operating rod b. Buffer c. Barrel d. Trigger

Item 47 What is the preferred material for cleaning and lubricating the M249 SAW?

a. Rifle Bore Cleaner (RBC) b. Cleaner, Lubricant, Preservative (CLP) c. Gasoline d. High pressure water

Item 48 What tool is used to clean carbon from the gas regulator on the M249 SAW?

a. Cleaning rod b. Bore punch c. Bore brush d. Scraper tool

Item 49 For which of the following extreme conditions should you do the following

on an M249 SAW: Inspect the weapon frequently for rust. Keep the weapon as moisture-free as possible. Field-strip, clean, and lubricate the weapon more often. Use a generous coat of lubricant. a. Hot, dry, and sandy b. Cold, snowy, and icy c. Cold, blizzard-like d. Damp and salty air

Continued on next page

Page 448: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-15 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 50 What is installed first in assembling the M249 SAW?

a. Gas cylinder b. Handguard c. Bipod d. Cleaning equipment

Item 51 Below, in scrambled order, are the steps for performing a function check on

the M249 SAW. Put the steps in the proper order. Then, answer the question. 1. Place the fire/safe switch on S and depress the trigger. 2. Place the fire/safe switch on F and depress the trigger. 3. Pull the bolt to the rear and lock cocking handle forward. Which is the correct sequence of steps for performing a function check on the M249 SAW? a. 1, 2, 3 b. 1, 3, 2 c. 2, 1, 3 d. 3, 1, 2

Item 52 The gunner for the M249 SAW can extend the legs of bipod when engaging

targets by a. grasping the foot of each leg and pulling down. b. holding the legs together and pulling down. c. releasing the legs in the down position. d. pulling down and away from the machinegun.

Continued on next page

Page 449: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-16 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 53 What are the components of the rear sight assembly on the M249 SAW?

a. Windage knob and leaf elevation b. Leaf windage and elevation knob c. Hooded elevation and leaf windage d. Elevation knob and windage knob

Item 54 You are firing your M249 SAW and you observe the strike of your rounds

impacting to the right of your target. What action would you have to take to bring the strike of the rounds on target? a. Turn the adjustment screw forward b. Change your sight alignment c. Move the windage knob backward (left) d. Move the windage scale to the right

Item 55 When is the 30-round magazine authorized for use in the M249 SAW?

a. When reloading the weapon under fire b. During an emergency situation c. If the weapon fails to feed the ammunition belt d. While applying immediate action during firing

Item 56 You apply immediate action on the M249 SAW when

a. a round is jammed in the chamber. b. the weapon won’t charge. c. there is a stoppage and you have not investigated the cause. d. the last round is fired from the 200-round ammunition box.

Continued on next page

Page 450: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-17 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 57 Which of the following states the role of the M240G?

a. Primarily provides automatic fire for the fire team in both offensive and

defensive operations b. Provides close defensive, final protective fires in the defense, either by

using a final protective line or a principle direction of fire c. Provides reconnaissance by fire on suspected enemy positions in either

offensive or defensive operations d. Supports the infantryman in offensive and defensive combat by providing

a heavy volume of controlled and accurate fire beyond the capability of individual small arms

Item 58 Which of the following is the maximum effective range to an area target in

meters for the M240G? a. 700 b. 1,000 c. 1,800 d. 3,725

Item 59 What are the descriptive characteristics of the M240G?

a. Belt-fed, air-cooled, gas-operated b. Belt-fed, water-cooled, gas-operated c. Belt-fed, air-cooled, recoil-operated d. Magazine-fed, air-cooled, blowback-operated

Item 60 Which is the correct sequence in the cycle of operation of the M240G?

a. Cocking, chambering, locking, firing, unlocking, extracting, ejecting,

feeding b. Firing, unlocking, extracting, ejecting cocking, feeding, chambering,

locking. c. Cocking, chambering, feeding, locking, firing, unlocking, extracting,

ejecting d. Feeding, chambering, cocking, locking, firing, unlocking, extracting,

ejecting

Continued on next page

Page 451: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-18 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 61 Which type of 7.62mm linked ammunition for the M240G can you use to

observe fire, create incendiary effect, signal, and mark targets? a. Ball b. Armor-piercing c. Tracer d. Dummy

Item 62 What is the first step in clearing your M240G after completing live fire

exercise? a. Raise the cover. b. Visually inspect the chamber. c. Physically inspect the chamber with your finger. d. Point the weapon down range or in a safe direction.

Item 63 Below in scrambled order are the steps for general disassembly of the

M240G. Put the steps in the proper order. Then, answer the question. 1. Remove the trigger housing group. 2. Remove the barrel. 3. Remove the operating group. 4. Remove the receiver group. 5. Remove the buttstock. Which is the correct sequence for general disassembly of the M240G? a. 4, 3, 1, 2, 5 b. 2, 4, 5, 3, 1 c. 3, 4, 2, 5, 1 d. 2, 1, 5, 4, 3

Continued on next page

Page 452: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-19 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 64 Below is a list of cleaning and lubricating materials. Use this list to answer

the question. 1. Cleaner Lubricant Preservative (CLP) 2. Rifle Bore Cleaner (RBC) 3. Turpentine 4. 3-in-1 oil 5. Dry cleaning solvent Which are authorized for the M240G? a. 1, 2, 5 b. 1, 4, 5 c. 2, 4, 5 d. 3, 4, 5

Item 65 Which is the proper maintenance schedule for your M240G after returning

from a field exercise? a. Clean the gun immediately until all carbon and CLP is removed. b. Clean and lubricate the gun for three consecutive days. c. Clean and lubricate the gun weekly. d. Let gun soak in CLP for five days, then clean and lubricate.

Item 66 What is the last part or group to be replaced during reassembly of the

M240G? a. Barrel group b. Buffer yoke c. Buttstock d. Trigger housing

Continued on next page

Page 453: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-20 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 67 Through 72

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the steps for inspecting the M240G in column 2 in the correct sequence in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 Correct Sequence

Column 2 Steps for Inspecting M240G

___67. ___68. ___69. ___70. ___71. ___72.

a. Examine the rear sight b. Inspect the barrel socket chamber

and bore for cracks c. Inspect the forward portion of the

receiver rails and the face of the bolt

d. Inspect the safety e. Inspect the bipod assembly f. Inspect the cover

Item 73 The top of the front sight should be _________when the gunner correctly

align the sights for the M240G on a target. a. to the left of the rear sight aperture b. to the right of the rear sight aperture c. centered in the rear sight aperture d. flush with the bottom of the rear sight aperture

Item 74 While loading the M240G with the cover raised, which of the following

conditions should exist? a. Bolt forward, safety on F b. Bolt forward, safety on S c. Bolt to the rear, safety on F d. Bolt to the rear, safety on S

Continued on next page

Page 454: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-21 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 75 What is the first step you must perform to clear the M240G?

a. Lift the feed tray cover. b. Pull the bolt to the rear. c. Clear the feed tray of ammunition. d. Lift the feed tray and inspect the chamber.

Item 76 What is the proper setting for the T&E mechanism when you are field zeroing

the M240G? a. Centered b. At the far left of the traversing bar c. At the far right of the traversing bar d. Zero degrees magnetic

Item 77 The gunner must ________ when changing the barrel on the M40G mounted

on it bipod. a. insert the cold barrel into the barrel socket and be sure it is fully seated b. lock the barrel into the receiver with the barrel lock. Then, you may

continue the mission c. lock the gun in position by the T&E mechanism and pintle lock d. stabilize the gun by locking the buttstock into your right shoulder

Item 78 Which of the following conditions is considered a malfunction of the

M240G? a. Defective ammunition b. Failure to fire c. Sluggish operation d. Failure to feed

Continued on next page

Page 455: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-22 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 79 What is a common cause for a runaway gun on a M240G?

a. Faulty ammunition b. Failure to unlock c. Worn parts d. Improper loading

Item 80 What is the first step in immediate action you must take when a stoppage

occurs with the M240G? a. Wait until the barrel cools to air temperature. b. Observe the ejection port while pulling the bolt to the rear. c. Lubricate the weapon, inspecting all parts. d. Wait 5 seconds for a hangfire.

Item 81 What is the role of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun?

a. Provides a high volume of fire, effective against lightly-skinned armored

vehicles, structures, and personnel b. Supports the infantry in both the offense and the defense by providing a

heavy volume of accurate, long-range fire c. Provides close defensive and final protective fires in the defense and

reconnaissance by fire on suspected enemy positions in the offense d. Provides protection for any motorized movement

Item 82 What are the descriptive characteristics of the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun? a. Belt-fed, air-cooled, gas operated b. Belt-fed, water-cooled, recoil-operated c. Magazine-fed, air-cooled, blowback-operated d. Belt-fed, air-cooled, recoil-operated

Continued on next page

Page 456: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-23 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 83 What mount is the principal ground mount for the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun? a. Vehicle mount b. M3 tripod mount c. M4 pedestal mount d. M66 ring mount

Item 84 What type of round for the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun is used for light

armored vehicles, concrete shelters, and other bullet-resisting targets? a. Ball b. Tracer c. Armor-piercing d. Armor-piercing incendiary

Item 85 Which of the following is the correct sequence of steps for the cycle of

operation of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun? a. Firing, unlocking, extracting, ejecting, cocking, feeding, chambering,

locking b. Feeding, extracting, unlocking, chambering, cocking, firing, ejecting,

locking. c. Feeding, cocking, chambering, locking, firing, ejecting, unlocking,

extracting d. Feeding, unlocking, extracting, ejecting, chambering, cocking, locking,

firing

Item 86 To clear the M2HB machinegun, the gunner removes the ammunition, locks

the bolt to the rear, opens the feed cover and then performs what step next? a. Inserts a cleaning rod down the barrel. b. Inspects the T-slot in the face of the bolt and chamber. c. Removes ammunition. d. Places the machinegun in the automatic mode.

Continued on next page

Page 457: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-24 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 87 The six steps for disassembling the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun are listed

below in scrambled order. Place them in the proper sequence. 1. Remove the bolt group 2. Remove the drive-spring rod assembly 3. Remove the barrel extension 4. Remove the buffer body 5. Remove the backplate 6. Remove the barrel group 7. Remove the barrel buffer assembly Which of the following is the correct order for disassembly of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun? a. 6, 2, 4, 7, 3, 5, 1 b. 6, 4, 7, 3, 1, 5, 2 c. 6, 5, 2, 1, 3, 4, 7 d. 4, 7, 3, 6, 1, 2, 5

Item 88 What maintenance schedule should be followed for the M2HB machinegun

while conducting a seven-day field exercise? a. Clean your machinegun after firing. b. Clean your machinegun several times per day. c. Clean your machinegun for three consecutive days. d. Clean your machinegun at least daily.

Item 89 What type of cleaner would you use on friction-producing parts and on the

exterior of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun? a. RBC b. CLP c. PL special d. LSA

Continued on next page

Page 458: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-25 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 90 When preparing an M2HB .50-caliber machinegun for inspection, set the

elevation for _______ meters and the windage to _____. a. 500, 10 left b. 750, 10 right c. 1000, 0 d. 1500, 0

Item 91 During reassembly of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun, after installing the

barrel extension and bolt? a. Replace the barrel buffer group only. b. Replace the T block. c. Replace the drive spring. d. Replace the barrel

Item 92 When should you perform a function check of the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun? a. After firing b. Before disassembling c. Immediately after assembling d. During an inspection

Item 93 What is correct sight alignment for the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun?

a. When the front sight blade is centered and halfway up in the rear sight

aperture b. When the top edge of the front sight at the center base of the target while

maintaining sight alignment c. When the front sight blade is at the bottom of the rear sight aperture d. When the front sight blade is at the top of the rear sight aperture

Continued on next page

Page 459: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-26 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 94 The two firing types for the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun are automatic

firing and a. single shot mode. b. three shot mode. c. burst mode. d. sniper.

Item 95 What are the two firing positions for the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun?

a. Kneeling, prone b. Prone, sitting (legs folded or legs extended) c. Kneeling, sitting (legs folded or legs extended) d. Standing, prone

Item 96 Which is a definition of a malfunction of the M2HB .50-caliber machinegun?

a. Any failure of the gun to function satisfactorily b. Uncontrollable automatic fire c. Failure to function freely d. Any interruption in the cycle of operation

Item 97 Which of the following is considered a stoppage on the M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun? a. Failure to fire b. Uncontrollable automatic fire c. Twisted ammunition belt d. Jammed trigger

Continued on next page

Page 460: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-27 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 98 While applying immediate action to an M2HB .50-caliber machinegun, the

weapon fails to fire. What is your next step? a. Clear the gun and inspect to determine the cause of the stoppage. b. Attempt to fire again. c. Re-lay on target. d. Repeat immediate action.

Item 99 Which of the following states a capability of the MK19?

a. Provides protection for motorized movement b. Provides a high volume of fire, effective against lightly armored vehicles,

structures, and personnel c. Provides indirect fire against vehicles, personnel, and bunkers d. Destroys enemy troops in defilade in support of infantry in the offense

and the defense

Item 100 Which of the following is the maximum effective range in meters against a

point target for the MK19? a. 1,100 b. 1,500 c. 1,830 d. 2,212

Item 101 Which of the following is the correct sequence of steps in the cycle of

operation of the MK19? a. Feeding, chambering, locking, firing, unlocking, extracting, ejecting,

cocking b. Cocking, locking, firing, unlocking, extracting, ejecting, feeding,

chambering c. Feeding, chambering, firing, extracting, ejecting, cocking d. Cocking, firing, extracting, ejecting, feeding, chambering

Continued on next page

Page 461: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-28 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 102 Which of the following is the standard round far the MK19?

a. HEDP b. HE c. Practice d. HEP

Item 103 The seven steps for clearing the MK19 are scrambled below. Place them in

the correct sequence to answer the question. 1. Open the top cover assembly. 2. Inspect the chamber and bolt face for ammunition. 3. Point the gun in a safe direction. 4. Place the safety switch to fire and ride the bolt forward. Return the

charger handles to their original position. 5. Place the fire/safe switch on the S position. 6. Lower and pull the charger handles slightly to the rear, allowing sufficient

space between the face of the bolt and the chamber for a visual inspection. 7. If ammunition is loaded in the gun, reach beneath the feeder and press the

primary and secondary positioning pawls. At the same time, slide the linked rounds out of the feeder and feed tray.

Which of the following lists the correct order of steps to clear the MK19? a. 6, 2, 1, 3, 7, 5, 4 b. 2, 7, 5, 1, 6, 4, 3 c. 3, 5, 1, 7, 6, 2, 4 d. 3, 7, 4, 1, 6, 5, 2

Continued on next page

Page 462: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-29 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 104 The procedures for disassembling the MK19 are listed below in scrambled

order. Place the procedures in the proper order. Then answer the question. 1. Remove the top cover assembly 2. Remove the alignment guide and ogive plunger 3. Remove the feed slide assembly and feed tray 4. Remove the secondary drive lever 5. Remove the primary drive lever and vertical cam assembly 6. Remove the bolt and backplate assembly 7. Remove the sear assembly 8. Remove round positioning block and charger assembly Which of the following lists the correct order of procedures for disassembling the MK19? a. 1, 3, 6, 4, 5, 7, 8, 2 b. 4, 1, 3, 6, 5, 7, 2, 8 c. 3, 6, 4, 1, 7, 8, 5, 2 d. 6, 2, 4, 1, 5, 8, 7, 2

Item 105 Which of the following cleaning and lubricating materials is the preferred

lubricant for the MK19? a. Cleaner, Lubricant, Preservative (CLP) b. Lubricant, Arctic Weather (LAW) c. Lubricant, Weapons, Semi-fluid (LSAT) d. Rifle Bore Clearer (RBC)

Continued on next page

Page 463: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-30 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 106 Which of the following is the recommended order for assembling the MK19?

a. In the same order it was disassembled b. Any random order c. In reverse order of disassembly

Item 107 The following are steps that you, the operator, should check before you

conduct a function check on the MK19. 1. Feed slide assembly is all the way to the left 2. Bolt is forward. Which step is missing in the list provided above? a. Secondary drive lever is properly engaged with the feed slide pin. b. Sights are zeroed. c. Round is fully seated. d. Slide the drive lever lock on the vertical cam forward.

Item 108 Which of the following types of mounts are used with the MK19?

a. M3 tripod mount, M49 bipod, M66 ring mount b. M3 tripod mount, M2 heavy machinegun mount, HMMWV weapons

station c. M64 cradle, M151 mount, M66 ring mount d. M3 tripod mount and vehicle mounts

Continued on next page

Page 464: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-31 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Items 109 Through 113

Matching: In the space provided, place the letter of the function in column 2 that matches the part on the MK19 sight assembly listed in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 MK19 Part

Column 2 MK19 Function

___ 109. Elevation wheel ___ 110. Sight frame ___ 111. Plunger ___ 112. Aperture carrier ___ 113. Windage screw

a. Sets the elevation. b. Releases the sight frame. c. Adjusts the degrees of elevation. d. Adjusts the windage. e. Contains the graduated range indications.

Item 114 What is the first thing you must do to prepare to engage a target with the

MK19? a. Adjust the T&E mechanism to obtain a sight picture on the target. b. Affix the AN/TVS-5 night vision sight. c. Estimate the range to the target. d. Check the plunger.

Item 115 In the sequence of steps in the procedure for feeding the MK19 listed below,

which is the missing step? 1. ______ 2. Insert the first round, female link first, into the feeder. 3. Push the round across the first pawl until you hear a “click.” 4. Move the secondary drive lever to the left and close the top cover. 5. Close the top cover. a. Raise the top cover. b. Clear the MK19. c. Charge the MK19. d. Sight in on the target.

Continued on next page

Page 465: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-32 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 116 In the sequence of steps in the procedure for charging the MK19 listed below,

which is the missing step? 1. Grasp the charger handles. 2. Press the charger handle locks in and rotate charger handles down. 3. _______ 4. Return the charger handles forward and rotate them up to the locked

position. a. Close the top cover. b. Ride the bolt forward. c. Unlock charger handles. d. Pull the chargers to the rear.

Item 117 In the sequence of steps for loading the first round onto the face of the bolt

into the MK19 listed below, which is the missing step? 1. Place the fire/safe switch on the F position. 2. Press the trigger. 3. _______ 4. Return the fire/safe switch to the S position. a. Open the top cover. b. Aim in on target. c. Charge the gun again. d. Ride the bolt forward.

Continued on next page

Page 466: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-33 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 118 In the sequence of steps in the procedure for firing the MK19 listed below,

which is the missing step? 1. Place the fire/safe switch in the F position. 2. __________ 3. Press the trigger to fire. a. Place your hands on the control grips with your thumbs on the trigger. b. Pull the chargers to the rear. c. Ensure that the top cover is closed. d. Aim in on the target.

Item 119 Which are the two most common malfunctions of the MK19?

a. Runaway gun and sluggish operation b. Dirt in the receiver and lack of lubrication c. Failure to feed and failure to fire d. Improper operation and an interruption in the cycle of operation

Item 120 Which of the following are the two most common types of stoppages of the

MK19? a. Runaway gun and sluggish operation b. Failure to feed and failure to fire c. Improper operation and an interruption in the cycle of operation d. Dirt in the receiver and lack of lubrication

Item 121 In combat, what is the first step in immediate action on the MK19?

a. Clear the gun and reload. b. Clear the gun and conduct a function check. c. Press charger handle locks and rotate charger handles down. d. Wait 5 seconds for a possible hangfire, then attempt to fire again.

Continued on next page

Page 467: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-34 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 122 What does the T&E mechanism allow you to do?

a. Engage armored vehicles at oblique angles. b. Fire from unsupported positions. c. Make a bipod-mounted gun fire more accurately. d. Quickly and accurately shift to predetermined targets.

Item 123 Which part of the T&E mechanism allows you to adjust direction left and

right? a. Upper elevating screw yoke b. Upper and lower elevating screw c. Traversing handwheel d. Elevating handwheel

Item 124 From the list below, which of the following is the procedure for centering the

traversing mechanism? a. Turn the traversing handwheel toward your body until the ZERO on the

scale is lined up with the ZERO index line. b. Turn the traversing handwheel until the muzzle of the weapon is centered

in your primary sector of fire. c. Turn the traversing handwheel toward your body as far as it will go, then

turn it two complete revolutions away from you. d. Slide the traversing slide so that the left edge is lined up with the index

line.

Item 125 You are assigned a final protective line to the right, across the front of a

platoon’s battle position. What would you do with the traversing slide to lay the machinegun? a. Lock the traversing slide all the way to the left on the traversing bar. b. Lock the left edge on the ZERO graduation of the traversing bar. c. Lock the traversing slide on the graduation that indicates the FPL. d. Leave the traversing slide unlocked.

Continued on next page

Page 468: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-35 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 126 You are obtaining a direction reading on the T&E. The M2HB .50-caliber

machinegun is on the center of the target. The gunner looks at the traversing bar scale and see that the left edge of the traversing slide is between 210 and 215 graduation. What is the next step the gunner must perform? a. Turn the traversing handwheel until the muzzle of the gun is centered. b. Move the left edge of the traversing slide to 210 graduation. c. Move the left edge of the traversing slide to 215 graduation. d. Add the mil readings to obtain your direction reading.

Item 127 In the sequence of steps in the procedure for obtaining an elevation reading

listed below, which is the missing step? 1. Estimate the range to the target and set the sight to this range. 2. _________ 3. Lower your head until your eyes are on line with the top of the elevating

handwheel. The first portion of this reading is the number and the plus or minus sign above the first visible index line.

4. Look at the top of the elevating handwheel. The second portion of the reading is the graduation on line with the indicator.

a. Place sandbags on the tripod legs. b. Lay the gun on the center base of the target. c. Align the elevating handwheel with the ZERO index line. d. Unlock the traverse slide mechanism.

Item 128 In addition to its primary target, the AT-4 may also be used against

a. low flying aircraft. b. open artillery positions. c. bunkers. d. personnel in an open field.

Continued on next page

Page 469: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-36 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 129 What is the maximum effective range in meters of the AT-4?

a. 200 meters b. 300 meters c. 400 meters d. 500 meters

Item 130 The main characteristics of an AT-4 are that it is a lightweight, _________,

anti-armor weapon. a. gas-operated b. self-contained c. blowback operated d. air cooled

Item 131 What is the caliber of the AT-4 rocket?

a. 74mm b. 84mm c. 94mm d. 104mm

Item 132 The _______ keeps out moisture and prevents foreign objects from entering

the muzzle. a. venturi b. muzzle cap c. color code band d. firethrough muzzle cover

Continued on next page

Page 470: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-37 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 133 The ________ is a safety that provides for safe transportation of the AT-4.

a. cocking lever b. red safety catch c. trigger safety d. transport safety pin

Item 134 The ________ sight on the AT-4 has a sight blade, range setting knob, range

scale, and two peep holes. a. front b. barrel c. rear d. gun

Item 135 Do not stack AT-4 containers more than ____ deep on a pallet.

a. 2 b. 3 c. 4 d. 5

Item 136 The color band used for the AT-4 practice round is

a. black/yellow. b. gold/yellow. c. blue. d. red.

Item 137 What part of the AT-4 should you inspect to ensure there are no cracks, dents,

or bulges? a. Body b. Rear seal c. Firethrough muzzle cover d. Color code band

Continued on next page

Page 471: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-38 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 138 The last safety to be disengaged before firing is the

a. transport safety pin. b. cocking lever. c. forward safety. d. trigger safety.

Item 139 The common causes for a misfire on the AT-4 are the a faulty fire

mechanism, _____________, and element in the propelling charge explosive train. a. forward safety not depressed far enough b. firing pin c. cocking lever d. rear safety pin

Item 140 When aiming the AT-4, the eye relief should be ___ to ___ inches.

a. 1, 3 b. 2, 2½ c. 2½, 3 d. 2½, 3½

Item 141 The placement of the front sight posts is primarily determined by the

a. distance to the target. b. speed of the target. c. level of visibility. d. angle of the target.

Item 142 The technique that should be applied when firing the AT-4 is the

a. steady hold. b. supported kneeling. c. supported prone. d. steady squeeze.

Continued on next page

Page 472: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-39 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 143 Which firing position for the AT-4 is preferred to track moving targets?

a. Standing b. Basic kneeling c. Modified kneeling d. Modified sitting

Item 144 The backblast danger zone A extends for how many meters?

a. 5 b. 15 c. 30 d. 60

Item 145 What is the minimum size of a room that an AT-4 can be fired from?

a. 10 feet by 10 feet b. 12 feet by 10 feet c. 15 feet by 15 feet d. 17 feet by 24 feet

Item 146 The most desirable way to determine range to possible engagement points in

the defense is by a. map estimation. b. visual estimation. c. pacing the distance. d. measuring with a M203 round.

Item 147 If a vehicle is moving at an oblique to your position, you consider its speed to

be a. slow. b. stationary. c. fast. d. medium.

Continued on next page

Page 473: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-40 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 148 What is the best method to use to engage a single target at a known distance?

a. Single firing b. Sequence firing c. Pair firing d. Volley firing

Items 149 Through 151

Matching: In the space provided place the letter of the definition from column 2 that identifies the armor destruction term for the AT-4 in column 1. The answers in column 2 may be used only once.

Column 1 Armor Destruction Term

Column 2 Definition

___ 149. Mobility kill ___ 150. Fire power kill ___ 151. Catastrophic kill

a. Only the main gun of a vehicle can not return fire

b. The vehicle is completely destroyed

c. The vehicle can not move, but it can return fire

Item 152 Do not fire the AT-4 when temperatures exceed its operating limits of ___ to

____ degrees Fahrenheit. a. -20/120 b. -30/130 c. -40/140 d. -50/150

Continued on next page

Page 474: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-41 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson, Continued

Item 153 Backblast danger zone “B” extends _____meters in a ____degree fan behind

the weapon. a. 5, 45 b. 5, 90 c. 60, 45 d. 60, 90

Item 154 When constructing a fighting position for AT-4's, consider

a. backblast. b. depth of position. c. storage for AT-4's d. obtaining frontal fires on the enemy.

Page 475: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-42 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson Solutions

Answers The table below provides the answers to the review lesson items. If you have

any questions, refer to the reference page listed for each item.

Item Number Answer Reference Page 1 a 1-4 2 c 1-6 3 c 1-7 4 c 1-8 5 a 1-12 6 c 1-15 7 c 1-18 8 b 1-18 9 a 1-20 10 a 1-26 11 b 1-30 12 c 1-31 13 a 1-33 14 b 1-36 15 b 1-37 16 c 2-4 17 b 2-5 18 a 2-7 19 d 2-14 20 b 2-15 21 b 2-17 22 d 2-17-2-18 23 c 2-19 24 a 2-25 25 c 2-26 26 a 2-30 27 b 2-31 28 b 2-33 29 b 2-41 30 c 2-42 31 b 2-43 32 a 2-43 33 b 2-44

Continued on next page

Page 476: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-43 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson Solutions, Continued

Answers, continued

Item Number Answer Reference Page

34 a 2-44 35 a 3-4 36 b 3-6 37 c 3-8 38 c 3-9 39 c 3-10 40 d 3-19/3-20 41 c 3-20 42 a 3-20 43 d 3-20 44 b 3-20 45 c 3-21 46 a 3-21 47 b 3-29 48 d 3-31 49 d 3-33 50 c 3-40 51 d 3-47 52 a 3-48 53 d 3-52 54 c 3-58 55 b 3-55 56 c 3-60 57 d 4-4 58 c 4-6 59 a 4-6 60 b 4-7 61 c 4-9 62 d 4-20 63 d 4-23 64 a 4-34 65 b 4-36 66 a 4-39 67 f 4-44 68 d 4-44

Continued on next page

Page 477: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-44 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson Solutions, Continued

Answers, continued

Item Number Answer Reference Page

69 c 4-44 70 b 4-44 71 e 4-44 72 a 4-44 73 c 4-54 74 d 4-55 75 b 4-57 76 a 4-58 77 d 4-59 78 c 4-60 79 c 4-60 80 d 4-61 81 b 5-5 82 d 5-9 83 b 5-10 84 c 5-13 85 a 5-14/15 86 b 5-21 87 c 5-22 88 d 5-29 89 d 5-29 90 c 5-31 91 c 5-36 92 c 5-41 93 a 5-54 94 a 5-56 95 b 5-58 96 a 5-60 97 a 5-61 98 d 5-63 99 b 6-4

Continued on next page

Page 478: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-45 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson Solutions, Continued

Answers, continued, continued

Item Number Answer Reference Page

100 b 6-5 101 a 6-7 102 a 6-8 103 c 6-16 104 b 6-18 105 c 6-27 106 c 6-34 107 a 6-43 108 d 6-44 109 c 6-51 110 e 6-51 111 b 6-51 112 a 6-51 113 d 6-51 114 c 6-52 115 b 6-53 116 d 6-54 117 c 6-54 118 a 6-55 119 a 6-56 120 b 6-57 121 c 6-58 122 d 7-4 123 c 7-5 124 c 7-10 125 a 7-11 126 b 7-13

Continued on next page

Page 479: Weapons

MCI Course 8017A R-46 Review Lesson Examination

Review Lesson Solutions, Continued

Answers, continued

Item Number Answer Reference Page

127 b 7-15 128 c 8-5 129 b 8-5 130 b 8-6 131 b 8-6 132 d 8-7 133 d 8-9 134 c 8-12 135 c 8-14 136 b 8-15 137 a 8-20 138 c 8-26 139 a 8-27 140 c 8-32 141 b 8-33 142 a 8-34 143 a 8-34 144 a 8-42 145 d 8-43 146 c 8-48 147 a 8-49 148 d 8-53 149 c 8-58 150 a 8-59 151 b 8-59 152 c 8-60 153 d 8-61 154 a 8-63